0% found this document useful (0 votes)

7K views232 pages

TSS 350 (440) System Manual

Q: Why is it crucial to maintain adequate grounding for sub-sea components, and what might occur if it is neglected?

Maintaining adequate grounding for sub-sea components is crucial to prevent severe corrosion. If neglected, parts of the system can act as 'sacrificial anodes,' slowly decaying during sub-sea operations, resulting in degraded performance or even catastrophic failure. To prevent this, proper ground connections at sea water potential must be established, particularly on pin number 2 of the SEP 'Power/Comms' port .

Q: What recommendations does the document provide to minimize errors when operating over a sloping target during surveys?

To minimize errors over a sloping target, the document advises operating the ROV as close as possible to the seabed to reduce measurement errors. It is crucial to ensure there is negligible fore-aft offset between the coil array and the transducer face of the altimeter. Additionally, angles of slope less than half the altimeter beamwidth generally do not affect measurements significantly. It is also recommended to keep the ROV with even trim and free from angles of skew to maintain accuracy .

Q: How does the document describe the effects of ROV roll and pitch on measurement accuracy during surveys?

The document details that ROV roll can introduce errors in the vertical range and lateral offset measurements. For instance, a roll angle can cause a lateral offset error proportional to Z.sin(Roll angle), where Z is the vertical distance between the coils and the target. Similarly, pitch affects the forward range estimate and depth-of-cover measurements. The errors due to pitch increase with the forward range. Small roll angles result in minor vertical measurement errors, typically not exceeding 3.5% for up to ±15° of roll .

Q: Describe how DeepView for Windows assists in operating the 350 System effectively, according to the document.

DeepView for Windows assists in operating the 350 System by providing a user-friendly interface to configure system parameters through the System Configuration Wizard. It enables users to define the SEP type, set communication parameters, and adjust specific survey parameters such as tone frequency and coil separation, which are crucial for accurate operation . The software automatically searches for an initialization file on startup, allowing the system to operate using saved configuration settings if compatible data packets from the SEP are detected; otherwise, it starts the Configuration Wizard for setup . Additionally, DeepView offers tools for data logging, file management, and system error checks, enhancing operational efficiency during surveys . It also supports a video overlay feature for displaying target coordinates during operations .

Q: What procedure is recommended for configuring the 350 System before beginning a survey, according to the document?

Before beginning a survey with the 350 System, ensure you install the surface and sub-sea components properly as instructed in Section 3, make all electrical connections as per Section 4, and establish an appropriate communication method between the surface and sub-sea components . Configure the system using DeepView for Windows, set key survey parameters such as tone frequency, and ensure the communication parameters are correct . It is also crucial to print details of the 350 System configuration at the start and the end of a survey .

Q: How does the SEP (Sub-sea Electronics Pod) ensure communication with the SDC (Surface Display Computer)?

The SEP communicates with the SDC primarily through the ROV umbilical using a 2-wire 20mA digital current-loop, where the SDC functions as the 'Master' and the SEP as the 'Slave' . This setup supports communication over distances up to 1000 meters. For longer distances or if communication is unreliable, a 4-wire 20mA digital current-loop can be used, suitable for up to 4000 meters . Alternatively, RS232 communication is used for distances up to 15 meters . The communication through the ROV umbilical involves bi-directional signals, and the system can be reconfigured by altering link settings in the SEP and the SDC . Both ends of the communication lines are opto-isolated to ensure signal integrity ."}

Q: What are the main components of the sub-sea installation described in the document, and what are their functions?

The main components of the sub-sea installation for the TSS 350 Cable Survey System include a Sub-sea Electronics Pod (SEP), two coil triads with three identical sensing coils each, and a sub-sea altimeter. The SEP is responsible for digital signal processing, power conditioning, and communication with the Surface Display Computer (SDC) and altimeter, performing data acquisition and calculating target coordinates. The coil triads, mounted on an ROV, detect the target cable's position relative to the seabed. The sub-sea altimeter measures the altitude of the ROV above the seabed, providing essential data for calculating target coordinates . Mounting components and cables for interconnecting the sub-sea components and ROV are also part of the installation .

Q: What are some of the potential sources of interference that the 350 System is designed to handle, and which factors might still affect its performance?

The 350 System is designed to handle interference from various sources. It can survey cables of any length by using a tone frequency that is easy to identify among other signals and is within a 'quiet' part of its pass band. The tone current should be of sufficient amplitude to rise above background noise . The System is also equipped to manage noise from cathodic protection systems by ensuring different tone frequencies . Factors that might still affect its performance include cable curvatures causing unpredictable distortion of magnetic fields, making data accuracy degrade when surveying non-straight cable paths . Saturation can occur when surveying power cables that carry high currents, potentially hindering position calculations, which requires either removing power or operating the ROV at a greater distance . Operating over ferrous rock deposits can introduce random distortion to the magnetic fields, degrading measurement accuracy . Additionally, errors might occur if the altimeter's placement is incorrect, or if the ROV's lateral offset affects depth measurements .

Q: In what ways is the deployment of blanking plugs crucial for SEP operations in underwater conditions?

The deployment of blanking plugs in SEP operations is crucial to prevent water ingress through unused ports. This is essential to avoid damage to the Sub-sea Electronics Pod (SEP) components in underwater conditions. Fitting the correct blanking plug ensures the protection of unused ports, thereby maintaining the integrity and functionality of the SEP under sub-sea installations . Proper installation of blanking plugs is part of adhering to care and maintenance procedures that maintain the system's depth rating and accuracy .

Q: What differences does the document highlight between the Type 1 and Type 2 SEPs, and are there any instructions regarding their interchangeability?

The key difference between Type 1 and Type 2 SEPs is the presence of an 'AUX OUTPUT' port on the Type 2 SEP, which the Type 1 SEP does not include . This port is necessary for connecting the 350 SEP to the 440 System when using the Dualtrack installation, indicating that these units are not interchangeable . If you wish to upgrade from a Type 1 to a Type 2 system, consultation with TSS is required .

This Manual contains full installation and operating instructions and is an important part of the 350 System. It is subject to change without notice and does not represent a commitment on the part of TSS (UK) Ltd.

Uploaded by

konrad_palmer

We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

0% found this document useful (0 votes)

7K views232 pages

TSS 350 (440) System Manual

Uploaded by

konrad_palmer

We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

You are on page 1/ 232

VT TSS Ltd

1, Garnett Close
Greycaine Industrial Estate
Watford, Herts, WD24 7JZ
Telephone +44 (0)1923 470800
Facsimile +44 (0)1923 470842
e-mail: [email protected]
24 hr Customer Support +44 (0)7899 665603
The information in this Manual is subject to
change without notice and does not represent
a commitment on the part of TSS (UK) Ltd
1 9 9 3
THE QUEEN'S AWARD FOR
EXPORT ACHIEVEMENT
abcdef
350
Cable Survey System
System Manual
Covers DeepView Software Version 3.1.3
and Firmware Version 3.7
Document P/N 402197
Issue 2.1
December 2003
Contents
DPN 402197 Issue 2.1 TSS (UK) Limited Page 1
CAUTIONARY NOTICES
This System Manual contains full installation and operating instructions and is an important
part of the 350 System. This Manual should remain easily available for use by those who will
install, operate and maintain the System.
WARNINGS and CAUTIONS
Where appropriate, this Manual includes important safety information. Safety infor-
mation appears as WARNING and CAUTION instructions.
You must obey these instructions:
WARNING instructions alert you to a potential risk of death or injury to users of the
350 System.
CAUTION instructions alert you to the potential risk of damage to the 350 System.
For your convenience, the Table of Contents section includes copies of all the
WARNING and CAUTION instructions contained in this Manual.
350 Cable Survey System
Page 2 TSS (UK) Limited Issue 2.1 DPN 402197
Technical Support and contact information
VT TSS Limited (incorporating SG Brown Limited)
1 Garnett Close,
Greycaine Industrial Estate,
Watford, Herts. WD24 7JZ
Tel: +44 (0)1923 470800
Fax: +44 (0)1923 470842
Out of UK Hours Technical Helpline: +44 (0)7899 665603
These hours are 4:30pm - 7:45am Monday to Friday
and 12:30pm Friday to 7:45am Monday
Microsoft Windows, Windows and Windows 2000 is a trademark of the Microsoft Corporation.
Other brands and product names may be registered trademarks of their respective holders.
Contents
DPN 402197 Issue 2.1 TSS (UK) Limited Page 3
CONTENTS
1 INTRODUCTION
1.1 System Description - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-4
1.2 Principle of Operation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-5
1.3 Quick Start for SDC-5 Users - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-6
1.4 Warranty - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-6
2 SYSTEM OVERVIEW
2.1 Scope of Delivery - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-2
2.2 Unpacking and Inspection - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-4
2.3 Surface Components - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-4
2.4 Sub-sea Components - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-8
2.4.1 Sub-sea Electronics Pod - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-8
2.4.2 Sensing Coils - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-10
2.4.2.1 Sensing Coil Components - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-11
2.4.3 Altimeter - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-12
2.4.3.1 Alternative Altimeter Types. - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-12
2.4.4 Remotely Operated Vehicles - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-13
3 PHYSICAL INSTALLATION
3.1 SDC Installation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-2
3.2 Sub-sea Installation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-3
3.2.1 SEP - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-3
3.2.2 Sensing Coils - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-5
3.2.2.1 Assembling the Coils- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-6
3.2.2.2 Mounting the Coils- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-9
3.2.3 Altimeter Installation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-11
3.3 Installation Check List - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-13
4 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
4.1 Sub-sea Components - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-2
4.1.1 Ground Connections - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-3
4.1.2 Care of Sub-sea Connectors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-4
4.1.3 Sub-sea Electronics Pod - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-4
4.1.3.1 Power Requirement - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-5
4.1.4 Sensing Coils - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-6
4.1.5 Sub-sea Altimeter - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-7
4.1.5.1 Direct connection to the SEP - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-8
4.1.5.2 Connection to the SDC - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-8
4.1.6 Roll/Pitch Sensor - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-9
4.2 Surface Display Computer - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-10
4.2.1 Power Connection - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-10
4.2.2 Communication Link SEP to SDC - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-10
4.2.2.1 Alternative Communication Methods - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-13
4.2.3 Interface to Data Logger - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-17
4.2.4 Interface to Video - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-17
350 Cable Survey System
Page 4 TSS (UK) Limited Issue 2.1 DPN 402197
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
5.1 Software Installation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-2
5.2 Power-on Procedure - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-3
5.3 DeepView For Windows - System Configuration - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-5
5.3.1 SEP type - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-5
5.3.2 Communication ports - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-6
5.4 Print Configuration - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-8
6 OPERATION SOFTWARE
6.1 Configuration - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-2
6.1.1 Survey Parameters - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-2
6.1.1.1 Tone Frequency - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-2
6.1.1.2 Threshold - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-2
6.1.1.3 Coil Separation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-2
6.2 DeepView for Windows Operating Controls - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-2
6.2.1 How to Use DeepView for Windows - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-2
6.2.1.1 DeepView File Menu Options - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-7
6.2.1.2 Run/ Display screen - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-8
6.2.1.3 Forward Search Screen - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-12
6.2.1.4 Other Windows - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-14
6.2.1.5 Configuration Options - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-18
6.2.2 Survey Parameters - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-18
6.2.2.1 Altimeter - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-20
6.2.2.2 External Data Logging - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-22
6.2.2.3 Analogue Output - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-23
6.2.2.4 Load Factory Defaults - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-23
6.2.2.5 Video Overlay Setup - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-23
6.2.3 DeepView for Windows Icon Tools - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-25
6.2.4 DeepView for Windows Function Keys - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-27
6.3 After the Dive - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-28
6.4 Replaying a Log File - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-29
6.5 Quality Control - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-31
7 OPERATING PROCEDURE
7.1 Before the Survey - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-2
7.1.1 Personnel and Equipment Availability - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-2
7.1.2 Tone Frequency - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-3
7.1.3 Survey Requirements - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-3
7.1.4 Installation Requirements - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-3
7.2 During the survey - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-4
7.2.1 Safety and Pre-dive checks - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-6
7.2.2 Data Logging - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-6
7.2.3 Replay Logged Data - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-7
7.3 Data Formats - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-8
7.3.1 External Logging Format - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-8
7.3.1.1 Co-ordinates and Signals Format - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-8
7.3.1.2 Forward Search mode - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-10
7.3.2 Internal Logging Format - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-11
7.3.3 Altimeter Data Format - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-14
Contents
DPN 402197 Issue 2.1 TSS (UK) Limited Page 5
7.3.3.1 Datasonics PSA 900 and PSA 9000 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-15
7.3.3.2 Ulvertech Bathymetric System - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-15
7.3.3.3 Simrad UK90 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-16
7.3.3.4 OSEL Bathymetric System - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-16
7.3.3.5 Tritech SeaKing Bathy 704 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-17
7.4 After the Survey - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-19
7.5 Operational Considerations - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-20
7.5.1 Operating Performance - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-20
7.5.2 Sources of Error - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-21
7.5.2.1 ROV Handling- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-21
7.5.2.2 Electrical Interference - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-25
7.6 ROVs - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-28
7.6.1 Speed of Operation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-28
7.6.2 Altitude above the Seabed - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-28
7.6.3 Automatic Steering - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-28
7.6.4 Tracked ROV - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-28
8 SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS
8.1 Specifications - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-2
8.1.1 Surface Display Computer - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-2
8.1.2 Sub-sea Electronics Pod - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-4
8.1.3 Search Coil Array - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-4
8.2 Performance - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-5
8.3 System Trials - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-6
8.3.1 Trials Configuration and Procedure - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-6
8.3.2 Results - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-8
8.3.2.1 Accuracy - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-8
8.4 Update Rate - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-9
9 MAINTENANCE
9.1 Circuit Description - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-2
9.1.1 Sensing Coils - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-3
9.1.2 Sub-sea Electronics Pod - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-4
9.1.2.1 Analogue-to-Digital Converter - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-4
9.1.2.2 Processor Board - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-5
9.1.2.3 Power Supply - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-7
9.1.3 Current Loop - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-7
9.2 Disassembly and Reassembly - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-9
9.2.1 Surface Display Computer - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-9
9.2.2 Sub-sea Electronics Pod - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-11
9.2.3 Coil Cable Continuity - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-17
9.3 Fault Identification - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-18
9.3.1 Fault on a Single Channel - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-19
9.3.2 Communications Failure - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-20
9.3.3 Poor Tracking Performance - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-23
9.3.4 Altimeter Failure - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-24
10 SYSTEM DRAWINGS
350 Cable Survey System
Page 6 TSS (UK) Limited Issue 2.1 DPN 402197
A OPERATING THEORY
A.1 Electromagnetic Fields - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -A-2
A.2 Field Detection - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -A-2
A.3 Signal Isolation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -A-3
A.4 Calculation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -A-4
A.4.1 Survey Mode - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - A-5
A.4.2 Forward Search Mode - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - A-7
A.4.3 Skew Measurement - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - A-8
B OPTIONS
B.1 Analogue Output - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - B-2
B.1.1 Analogue Output Specification - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - B-2
B.1.2 Analogue Output Installation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - B-3
B.1.3 DeepView for Windows Operation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - B-4
B.1.3.1 Analogue Scaling - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - B-4
B.1.3.2 Analogue Trim - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - B-4
B.1.3.3 Analogue Polarity - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - B-4
B.1.3.4 Analogue Output - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - B-4
B.1.4 Output Voltages - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - B-5
B.2 Dualtrack System - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - B-6
B.2.1 The Equipment - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - B-6
B.2.2 The Differences - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - B-7
B.2.3 Scope of Delivery - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - B-8
B.2.4 Physical Installation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - B-10
B.2.4.1 Search-coils - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - B-10
B.2.4.2 Sub-sea Pods - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - B-10
B.2.5 Electrical Connection - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - B-11
B.2.5.1 System Configuration - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - B-13
B.2.5.2 System Operation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - B-14
B.2.6 Power Supply Requirement - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - B-14
B.3 Training - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - B-15
B.3.1 Part 1: Foundation Course - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - B-15
B.3.2 Part 2: Operators and Engineers Course - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - B-16
C CABLES AND TONES
C.1 Tone Injection - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - C-2
C.1.1 Frequency Selection - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - C-2
C.1.2 Connection to the cable - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - C-2
C.1.2.1 Short cables - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - C-2
C.1.2.2 Long cables - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - C-3
C.1.2.3 Fibre-optic Cables - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - C-3
C.1.2.4 General Connection Requirements - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - C-4
C.1.3 Seawater Return Path - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - C-4
D REFERENCE
D.1 Survey Details - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -D-3
D.2 System Configuration Details - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -D-3
Contents
DPN 402197 Issue 2.1 TSS (UK) Limited Page 7
E ALTIMETER
E.1 Overview - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - E-1
E.2 Installation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - E-1
E.2.1 Electrical Connection - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - E-1
E.2.2 Serial Output - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - E-2
E.2.3 Mounting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - E-2
E.2.4 Maintenance - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - E-3
E.2.5 Test in Air - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - E-4
E.2.6 Internal Settings - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - E-4
E.3 Theory of Operation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - E-5
E.3.1 Operating Principles - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - E-5
E.3.1.1 Speed of Sound - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - E-5
E.3.1.2 Terminology- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - E-6
E.3.1.3 Propagation Loss - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - E-7
E.3.1.4 Limitations - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - E-7
E.3.2 Technical Description - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - E-8
E.3.2.1 Power Supply - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - E-8
E.3.2.2 Transmitter - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - E-9
E.3.2.3 Receiver- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - E-9
E.3.2.4 Sensor Circuitry - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - E-10
E.3.2.5 Digital Circuitry - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - E-10
E.3.2.6 Averaging Algorithm - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - E-10
E.3.2.7 Optional Modem- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - E-11
E.4 Part Numbers - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - E-11
E.5 Drawings - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - E-12
350 Cable Survey System
Page 8 TSS (UK) Limited Issue 2.1 DPN 402197
Figures
DPN 402197 Issue 2.1 TSS (UK) Limited Page vii
Figure 21 Components of the 350 Cable Survey System - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-2
Figure 22 Surface Display Computer - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-5
Figure 23 SDC control features - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-6
Figure 24 Components of a coil triad - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -2-11
Figure 31 SEP mounting arrangement - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-4
Figure 32 The coil array reference line - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-5
Figure 33 Construction of the starboard coil triad - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-7
Figure 34 Coil mounting components - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-9
Figure 35 Effects of altimeter horizontal offset - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -3-12
Figure 41 System interconnection diagram - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-2
Figure 42 SDC Rear panel with key to ports - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -4-10
Figure 43 Link detail shown using the same orientation as in Figure 44 - - - - - - -4-14
Figure 44 Link location on the SEP processor board - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -4-14
Figure 45 Location of link LK1 on the SDC Converter Card - - - - - - - - - - - - -4-16
Figure 51 DeepView for Windows - System Configuration Wizard - - - - - - - - - 5-5
Figure 61 An example of a File Option menu - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-7
Figure 62 An example of the Print Configuration via Windows Notepad - - - - - - - 6-8
Figure 63 DeepView - Run Window - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-9
Figure 64 DeepView - Forward Search Window - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -6-12
Figure 65 Scope Window - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -6-14
Figure 66 Spectrum Analyser Window - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -6-14
Figure 67 System Errors window - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -6-15
Figure 68 Terminal window - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -6-17
Figure 69 System Configuration - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -6-18
Figure 610 Threshold does not apply to vertical coils. - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -6-19
Figure 611 Altimeter Configuration - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -6-21
Figure 612 Altimeter Test - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -6-22
Figure 613 External Output Configuration and Serial Port menu - - - - - - - - - - -6-23
Figure 614 Video Overlay Setup - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -6-24
Figure 615 Video Overlay Signal - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -6-24
Figure 616 Video Overlay Enable/Disable button - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -6-25
Figure 617 DeepView function keys - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -6-28
Figure 618 Replay a log file screen - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -6-29
Figure 619 Replay toolbar keys - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -6-29
Figure 71 Using the forward search mode - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-5
Figure 72 ROV positioning errors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -7-21
Figure 73 ROV roll errors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -7-22
Figure 74 Sloping target - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -7-24
Figure 75 Curved target - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -7-27
Figure 81 Vertical range measurement accuracy - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-5
Figure 82 Trials site - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-7
350 Cable Survey System
Page viii TSS (UK) Limited Issue 2.1 DPN 402197
Figure 91 Simplified interconnection diagram Sub-sea installation - - - - - - - - - 9-2
Figure 92 Simplified schematic of the current-loop - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-8
Figure 93 SDC transit case - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -9-10
Figure 94 Rear access panels of the SDC - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -9-10
Figure 95 Side access panel of the SDC - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -9-11
Figure 96 Processor Board layout - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -9-13
Figure 97 ADC Board layout - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -9-14
Figure 98 Power Supply Board layout - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -9-15
Figure 99 Orientation of the coil connector end-cap - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -9-16
Figure 910 Single channel failure - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -9-19
Figure 911 Communications failure CHART 1 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -9-20
Figure 912 Communications failure CHART 2 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -9-21
Figure 913 Communications failure CHART 3 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -9-22
Figure 914 Poor tracking performance - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -9-23
Figure 915 Altimeter failure CHART 1 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -9-24
Figure 916 Altimeter failure CHART 2 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -9-25
Figure A1 Lines of magnetic flux - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - A-2
Figure A2 Simplified signal path - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - A-3
Figure A3 Frequency windows - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - A-4
Figure A4 The effect of incident angle on coil response - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - A-5
Figure A5 Coil response as incident angle varies - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - A-5
Figure A6 Determination of relative angle using two coil voltages - - - - - - - - - - A-6
Figure A7 Target location using two coil pairs - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - A-7
Figure A8 Forward Range Calculation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - A-7
Figure A9 Vehicle following target with skew angle - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - A-8
Figure A10 Skew angle measurement - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - A-9
Figure B1 Surface Display Computer - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - B-8
Figure B2 Sub-sea components of the TSS 350 System - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - B-8
Figure B3 Sub-sea components of the TSS 440 System - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - B-9
Figure B4 Electrical interconnection of sub-sea components - - - - - - - - - - - - B-11
Figure C1 Tone injection Short cables - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - C-3
Figure C2 Tone injection Long cables - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - C-3
Figure E1 Mounting arrangement - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - E-3
Figure E2 Switch S1 layout - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - E-4
Figure E3 Reassembly of the unit. - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - E-5
Figure E4 Speed of Sound meter - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - E-6
Figure E5 Block Diagram - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - E-12
Figure E6 Internal wiring - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - E-13
Figure E7 Temperature sensor wiring - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - E-13
Figure E8 ALT-250 / TSS underwater splice p/n 601824A - - - - - - - - - - - - E-14
Figure E9 ALT-250 free cable - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - E-15
Figure E10 PCB layout - top - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - E-16
Figure E11 PCB - top - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - E-16
Figure E12 PCB layout - bottom - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - E-17
Figure E13 PCB bottom - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - E-17
Tables
DPN 402197 Issue 2.1 TSS (UK) Limited Page ix
Table 21 Components of the 350 Cable Survey System - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2- 3
Table 41 Power and Communications cable - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4- 6
Table 42 RS232 connection to COM2 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4- 9
Table 43 Ideal twisted pair characteristics for successful communication - - - - - - 4- 11
Table 44 Power and Communications cable 2-wire current loop connections - - - 4- 12
Table 45 Power and Communications cable 4-wire current-loop connections - - - 4- 12
Table 46 Power and Communications cable RS232 connections - - - - - - - - - 4- 12
Table 47 Link settings for LK1 to LK5 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4- 14
Table 48 Part numbers for SDC Converter Card links - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4- 16
Table 49 RS232 connection for a data logger - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4- 17
Table 61 DeepView Menu Commands - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6- 3
Table 62 Internal Data Logging - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6- 7
Table 63 System errors format - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6- 16
Table 64 Terminal Window toolbar- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6- 17
Table 65 Factory System Defaults - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6- 23
Table 66 DeepView Toolbar - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6- 25
Table 67 Run Window Toolbar - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6- 27
Table 68 Replay toolbar function keys - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6- 30
Table 71 External Output format - Survey Mode - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7- 8
Table 72 QC check code meaning Survey mode - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7- 10
Table 73 External logging format Forward search mode - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7- 10
Table 74 QC check code meaning Forward search mode - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7- 11
Table 75 Internal logging format Survey co-ordinates - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7- 12
Table 76 Internal logging format Forward search mode - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7- 13
Table 77 Internal logging format Signals packet - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7- 14
Table 78 Altimeter output format TSS and Datasonics - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7- 15
Table 79 Altimeter output format Datasonics with pressure transducer - - - - - - 7- 15
Table 710 Altimeter output format Ulvertech Bathymetric system - - - - - - - - 7- 16
Table 711 Altimeter output format Simrad UK90 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7- 16
Table 712 Altimeter output format OSEL bathymetric system - - - - - - - - - - 7- 17
Table 713 Tritech SeaKing Bathy format - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7- 18
Table 81 Vertical measurement errors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8- 8
Table 82 Lateral measurement errors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8- 9
Table 91 Connections to the coil cable - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9- 17
Table B1 Analogue output port details - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - B- 3
Table B2 Components of the Dualtrack System - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - B- 9
Table C1 Effects of tone frequency choice - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - C- 2
Table E1 Altimeter Specification - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -E- 1
Table E2 Power/ data connector pinout - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -E- 2
Table E3 Switch S1 settings - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -E- 4
Table E4 Testpoints - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -E- 8
Table E5 Part numbers - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - E- 11
350 Cable Survey System
Page x TSS (UK) Limited Issue 2.1 DPN 402197
GLOSSARY
Item Definition as used throughout this Manual
ROV Remotely operated vehicle. Any form of sub-sea or surface vehicle supporting the 350 Sys-
tem during survey operations.
SDC Surface display computer. The configuration, control and display computer supplied by
TSS to operate the 350 System.
SEP Sub-sea electronics pod. The single electronics housing for the sub-sea installation.
COV Target depth of cover. The SDC computes this as VRT-ALT
ALT Coil altitude above the seabed. This could be measured by a sub-sea altimeter connected
either directly to the SEP or through an umbilical to the SDC. Where there is no altimeter
fitted to the System, ALT could contain a fixed coil height that you specify during the config-
uration procedure.
FWD Forward range measured to the target in when in forward search mode.;
Tables
DPN 402197 Issue 2.1 TSS (UK) Limited Page xi
AMENDMENTS
OLD
ISSUE NO.
NEW
ISSUE NO.
DATE DETAILS
- 2.0 25.07.2000 First issue to cover SDC8 / DeepView / 440.
2.0 2.1 19.12.2003 Revised for latest software.
350 Cable Survey System
Page xii TSS (UK) Limited Issue 2.1 DPN 402197
1 Introduction
DPN 402197 Issue 2.1 TSS (UK) Limited Page 1-1 of 8
1 INTRODUCTION
The TSS 350 Cable Survey System is a complete package of equipment that you may install
on board a remotely operated sub-sea vehicle (ROV). The System provides a convenient and
uncomplicated method for performing accurate submarine surveys on a tone-carrying cable.
The burial state of the target has no effect on System operation.
This Manual describes the Type 2 TSS 350 Cable Survey System.
The Type 1 System differs only in the design of the sub-sea electronics pod (SEP) and does
not allow the System to be combined with the sub-sea components of a TSS 340 or 440 Sys-
tem for operation in Dualtrack mode. The Type 1 System is no longer available from TSS.
The 350 System includes a display and control computer that you should install where you
may see its screen easily while you operate the ROV. The display includes information to help
you guide the ROV along the course of the target. This Surface Display Computer (SDC)
makes all acquired survey data available to external data logging equipment.
The 350 System operates in real time and provides accurate measurements at a rate that allows
deployment on board faster ROVs. The measurement technology used by the System also
allows it to operate out of water with no degradation in performance, range or accuracy. You
may therefore use the System for land-based or amphibious survey applications.
This System Manual contains full installation and operating instructions and is an important
part of the 350 System. You should ensure the Manual remains easily available for use by
those who will install, operate and maintain the System.
When supplied new, the sub-sea components are all fully sealed and depth rated to the specifi-
cations listed in Section 8. To maintain the specified depth rating throughout the lifetime of
the System, follow the maintenance and care instructions included in Section 9.
Provided you follow the installation, operating and maintenance instructions included
throughout this Manual, the 350 System will maintain its specified measurement accuracy
with no need for further factory re-calibration.
Installation and operation of the 350 System are not complex tasks. However, you should
spend time to familiarise yourself with the contents of this Manual before you start to install or
use the System. Time you spend in identifying the task sequence now will help you to have
your System operational in the minimum of time.
WARNINGS and CAUTIONS
Where appropriate, this Manual includes important safety information, which appears
as WARNING and CAUTION instructions. You must obey these instructions:
WARNING instructions alert you to a potential risk of death or injury to users of the 350
System.
CAUTION instructions alert you to the potential risk of damage to the 350 System.
350 Cable Survey System
Page 1-2 of 8 TSS (UK) Limited Issue 2.1 DPN 402197
Throughout this Manual, measurements conform to the SI standard of units.
For your convenience, this Manual includes several sections, each of which describes specific
features of the 350 System:
You should read sections 1 to 4 before you attempt to install the 350 System:
Section 1 contains introductory notes to describe the TSS 350 System.
Section 2 describes the 350 Cable Survey System and its sub-assemblies.
Section 3 explains how to install the surface and the sub-sea components correctly.
Section 4 explains how to complete the electrical interconnection between the surface and
the sub-sea components. This section also explains how you should select and
establish a suitable communication method between the surface and sub-sea
installations.
You should read sections 5 to 7 before you use the 350 System to perform a survey:
Section 5 explains how to configure the 350 System for a particular installation by using
the DeepView display software.
Section 6 describes how to operate the 350 System during a survey by using the Deep-
View display software. The software allows easy access to all the facilities that
you might require during a target survey.
Section 7 explains how to use the 350 System before, during and after a survey operation.
It also explains some of the factors that may affect the performance of the 350
System during a survey
Section 8 provides a full set of hardware specifications for the standard 350 System. This
section also shows the operational capabilities of the 350 System under ideal
survey conditions.
You should read section 9 if the 350 System fails to operate normally due to a suspected fault
condition:
Section 9 provides a brief circuit description of the sub-sea components, and includes
flow charts to help you identify and eliminate faults by board replacement. It
also includes the mechanical and electrical drawings for the System.
Section 10 contains the techincal drawings for the system.
Follow the advice and instructions in Section 9 if you suspect a failure of the 350 System. If
you cannot correct the problem, contact TSS for technical assistance. The title page of this
Manual includes the contact details for TSS Limited. TSS also operates a 24-hour emergency
customer support service managed by trained and experienced engineers. Please make certain
you have read Section 9 of this Manual and that you have a full description of the suspected
fault condition before you contact TSS for technical assistance.
1 Introduction
DPN 402197 Issue 2.1 TSS (UK) Limited Page 1-3 of 8
For reference, this Manual also contains Appendices that provide additional information
about the 350 System:
Appendix A describes the operating theory of the 350 System.
Appendix B describes the options available for use with the System:
The Analogue Output feature that you may use to provide control signals for
an automatic steering feature on a tracked ROV.
Use of the TSS 350 System when combined with the sub-sea components of
a TSS 440 Pipe and Cable Survey System and controlled by a single SDC.
This is called the TSS Dualtrack.
A specialised TSS training programme available for those who may be
involved in any survey that uses the 350 System.
Appendix C gives some basic information and instructions for injecting a tone onto a cable.
Appendix D includes a sample Configuration Log sheet, and drawings to show the Run and
Forward Search windows for use with the 350 System.
Appendix E gives operating and service information for the TSS ALT-250.
350 Cable Survey System
Page 1-4 of 8 TSS (UK) Limited Issue 2.1 DPN 402197
1.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
WARNING
The protection provided by the 350 System might be impaired if you use the equipment
in a manner not specified by TSS. For safety reasons, always follow the instructions
and advice included throughout this Manual. If necessary, contact TSS for technical
advice.
TSS has designed the 350 Cable Survey System primarily for use in surveying operations on
submarine cables. In this application the System measures, displays and records the position
of the target relative to the ROV, and its depth of cover beneath the seabed.
Operation of the TSS 350 System is unaffected by the burial state of the target cable, the pres-
ence of non-ferrous metallic objects, or the heading of the search ROV.
The TSS 350 System consists of a surface control and display computer and the depth rated
components of the sub-sea installation:
Surface Display Computer
You should use the SDC to configure and control the 350 System. It communicates with the
sub-sea installation using bi-directional signals transmitted through the ROV umbilical.
By interpreting the signals from the sub-sea installation, the SDC generates a clear graphical
display that helps you to guide the ROV towards the target and then to follow a course imme-
diately above it.
Simultaneously, the SDC uses one of its four serial data ports to transmit the real time survey
information to an external data logging system.
Sub-sea installation
The sub-sea installation includes the following components:
A sub-sea electronics pod (SEP)
Two coil triads, each of which supports three identical receiving coils
A sub-sea altimeter
Mounting components to install the coil components on the ROV
Cables you will need to interconnect the sub-sea components of the 350 System.
1 Introduction
DPN 402197 Issue 2.1 TSS (UK) Limited Page 1-5 of 8
All sub-sea components of a new installation have a depth rating to the specifications listed in
Section 8. The main label of the SEP also confirms the depth rating of this component. Pro-
vided you exercise all proper maintenance procedures explained in Section 9, the sub-sea
components will retain their specified depth rating throughout their working life.
Refer to sub-section 2.4 for descriptions of the main sub-sea components of the 350 System.
During survey operations, the sub-sea installation measures the target co-ordinates. These are:
The vertical range to the target (VRT).
The lateral offset of the target relative to the centre of the coil array (LAT).
The altitude (ALT) of the coil array above the seabed, and the depth of target cover (COV).
To make these measurements, the 350 System must receive altitude information from an
altimeter. Alternatively, where the design of the ROV allows for a constant coil height, you
may configure the System with this information instead.
The angle of skew (SKEW) between the target and the coil array.
The forward range to the target (FWD) when you operate the System in its forward search
mode. You must supply altitude measurements to the System before this feature can oper-
ate.
The SEP performs the signal processing functions necessary to generate accurate survey data
using a powerful algorithm developed especially for this application. Communication signals
from the sub-sea installation therefore include all the relevant survey information with no need
for additional processing by the SDC.
The 350 System operates continuously in real time and provides accurate measurements at a
rate that allows deployment on board faster ROVs. The System displays the information that it
acquires in a clear graphical format on the SDC. The SDC also makes the same information
available for serial transmission to an external logging system.
When supplied new, the SEP, the coils, cables and other sub-sea components are all fully
sealed and depth rated. To maintain their approved depth rating throughout the lifetime of the
System, follow the installation, operating, care and maintenance instructions included
throughout this Manual. Provided you follow the instructions included throughout this Man-
ual, the 350 System will maintain its specified measurement accuracy with no need for further
factory re-calibration.
1.2 PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
The TSS 350 Cable Survey System uses an array of six identical sensing coils arranged in two
coil triads to detect the alternating magnetic fields that surround a tone-carrying cable. The
directional characteristics of the individual sensing coils in each triad enable the System to
locate the relative position of the target cable.
350 Cable Survey System
Page 1-6 of 8 TSS (UK) Limited Issue 2.1 DPN 402197
The method used by the 350 System to locate and survey the target cable is insensitive to the
effects of:
Variations in the magnitude of tone current
Terrestrial magnetism
Burial condition of the target cable
The presence of non-ferrous metallic objects in the search area.
1.3 QUICK START FOR SDC-5 USERS
This manual describes the operation of a 350 Cable Survey System used with the latest SDC-8
Surface Display Computer. This software is based on Windows 2000, and a new control pro-
gram called Deepview for Windows. This new SDC is compatible only with a 440 Pipe and
Cable survey system when used in a Dualtrack configuration. For users who have used the
older generation of DOS software, the software will be simple to operate, however there are
the following important differences:
Windows user interface. The setting up of survey parameters, external logging etc. is now
performed via menus and dialogs.
New forward search screen.
Highly improved video overlay.
Internal logging improved.
Dualtrack configuration requires a 350 and 440 unit; the 340 is no longer supported.
The 350 SEP has not changed: the communications protocols, pinouts and ratings are exactly
the same. For this reason, both the old and new SDCs can be used with a standalone 350.
1.4 WARRANTY
TSS Limited warrants the 350 Cable Survey System to be free of defects in materials or work-
manship for one year beginning on the date when the equipment was shipped from the factory
or from an authorised distributor of equipment manufactured by TSS Limited.
To ship the units between installation sites or to return them to TSS Limited or an
authorised distributor for repair, package them with care. TSS Limited recommends
that you should retain the original packing case for this purpose.
The use of improper packing for shipping any part of this equipment will void the war-
ranty.
For information concerning the proper return location and procedure, contact TSS Limited or
an authorised distributor. The title page of this Manual lists the contact details for TSS Lim-
ited.
The responsibility of TSS Limited in respect of this warranty is limited solely to product
replacement or product repair at an authorised location only. Determination of replacement or
1 Introduction
DPN 402197 Issue 2.1 TSS (UK) Limited Page 1-7 of 8
repair will be made by TSS Limited personnel or by personnel expressly authorised by TSS
Limited for this purpose.
This warranty will not extend to damage or failure resulting from misuse, neglect, accident,
alteration, abuse, improper installation, non-approved cables or accessories, or operation in an
environment other than that intended.
In no event will TSS Limited be liable for any indirect, incidental, special or consequen-
tial damages whether through tort, contract or otherwise. This warranty is expressly in
lieu of all other warranties, expressed or implied, including without limitation the
implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose. The foregoing
states the entire liability of TSS Limited with respect to the products described herein.
Contact TSS Limited for information if further cover is required beyond the warranty period.
350 Cable Survey System
Page 1-8 of 8 TSS (UK) Limited Issue 2.1 DPN 402197
2 System Overview
DPN 402197 Issue 2.1 TSS (UK) Limited Page 2-1 of 14
2 SYSTEM OVERVIEW
You should read this section of the Manual before you unpack or install the 350 System.
This section tells you about the important checks and inspections that you should make when
you first receive the TSS 350 System. It also includes a brief description of the main items
supplied as standard with the System.
If you must ever exchange any of the System sub-assemblies, please make certain you include
a full description of the part you require with your order. If possible, also include the part
number of the component you require and the serial number of the relevant sub-assembly.
2.1 Scope of Delivery Page 2
Describes the items supplied as part of the standard TSS 350 Cable Survey System.
2.2 Unpacking and Inspection Page 4
Explains the inspections and checks that you should make as you unpack the TSS 350 System.
2.3 Surface Components Page 4
Describes in detail the surface components of the standard TSS 350 System.
2.4 Sub-sea Components Page 8
Describes in detail the sub-sea components of the standard TSS 350 System.
350 Cable Survey System
Page 2-2 of 14 TSS (UK) Limited Issue 2.1 DPN 402197
2.1 SCOPE OF DELIVERY
The 350 System includes various sub-assemblies that you must interconnect properly before
the System will work.
Figure 21 shows a typical stand-alone configuration for the 350 System that has the SDC
installed on a surface vessel and the sub-sea components mounted on the ROV. Table 21
identifies the individual components of the installation.
Optionally, you may use the 350 System as part of a Dualtrack installation. In this mode, a sin-
gle SDC controls the operation of the 350 Cable Survey System when its sub-sea components
are connected to a TSS 440 Pipe and Cable Survey System. Refer to Appendix B.2 for instruc-
tions to connect and configure the 350 System within a Dualtrack installation.
Figure 21: Components of the 350 Cable Survey System
Sub-sections 2.3 and 2.4 below provide detailed descriptions of the surface and the sub-sea
components of the 350 System
7 8 9 /
4 5 6
1 2 3
0 . = +
A B C
E F G
I J K
M N O
Q R S
U V W
Y Z Space
ENTER Back Space Upper
D
H
L
P
T
X
Shift
2 System Overview
DPN 402197 Issue 2.1 TSS (UK) Limited Page 2-3 of 14
Table 21: Components of the 350 Cable Survey System
CAUTION
Earlier versions of the 350 System and sub-sea altimeter were depth rated to 1000
metres only. DO NOT use these earlier versions of hardware for surveying targets at
depths greater than 1000 metres.
You may recognise the two types of SEP easily:
Type 1 SEPs that have a 1000 metres depth rating show
a visible end-cap thickness of 6mm. They also have
serial numbers with three digits.
Type 2 SEPs that have a 3000 metres depth rating show
a visible end-cap thickness of 11mm. They also have
serial numbers with four digits.
The 3000 metre depth-rated altimeter is stainless steel with
a bright finish. The earlier 1000 metre depth-rated version
had a black finish.
You may use a Datasonics altimeter with the 350 System.
The Datasonics PSA 900 has a depth rating to 2000 metres,
and the PSA 9000 has a depth rating to 6000 metres.
TSS can supply the SDC fitted with an Analogue Output board. This optional facility supplies
an analogue output voltage that varies with the relative lateral offset distance between the tar-
get cable and the centre of the coil array. If you interface the Analogue Output option to a suit-
Item Description

Surface display computer (SDC) with:

Proprietary TSS control, display and logging software pre-installed on the internal hard disk
Auto-range power supply that accepts AC supply voltages in the range 85 to 265V (47 to 63Hz) at
250VA maximum
Integral alphanumeric and function keypads
Integral flat panel colour display
Single 3.5-inch disk drive (behind the fold-down panel)
CD-ROM drive (behind the fold-down panel)
Current-loop interface card
Video overlay card and dual-head graphics card.
W
Data cable for connection between the SDC and the ROV umbilical
W
Power and data cable (or ROV Tail) that connects the SEP to the ROV umbilical and power distribution
system
W
Depth rated Sub-sea Electronics Pod (SEP)

Port and starboard coil connection cables

Port and starboard coil triads. These each include three identical coils arranged so that the starboard triad
is a mirror image of the port triad.
W
Altimeter connection cable for the altimeter type in use
W
Sub-sea altimeter
350 Cable Survey System
Page 2-4 of 14 TSS (UK) Limited Issue 2.1 DPN 402197
able steering system, the 350 System could steer a tracked ROV automatically along the path
of the buried target. The SDC software allows you to configure the polarity, scale and offset
values for the analogue output so that it matches the needs of the automatic steering facility on
your ROV.
Read Appendix B for a description of the Analogue Output option.
2.2 UNPACKING AND INSPECTION
TSS performs a series of careful examinations and tests on the electrical function and mechan-
ical integrity of the 350 System during manufacture and before dispatch. Special shock pro-
tecting cases safeguard the System during transit so that it should arrive without damage or
defect.
Retain the original transit cases so that you may use them if you must transport the 350
System for any reason. You will invalidate the warranty if you use improper packing
during transportation.
As soon as possible after you have received the 350 System, check all items against the ship-
ping documents. Perform a careful visual examination of all sub-assemblies and inspect them
for any damage that might have occurred during transportation.
Notify TSS (UK) Limited immediately if there are parts or sub-assemblies missing from your
shipment. If you see any damage to the System, file a claim with the insurers and inform TSS.
The title page of this Manual lists the contact details for TSS (UK) Limited. TSS also operates
a 24-hour emergency telephone support line managed by trained and experienced TSS engi-
neers.
To avoid loss or damage to any components of the System, store all sub-assemblies safely in
their transit cases until you need to install them. Obey the environmental limits for storage
listed in Section 8 for all sub-assemblies.
2.3 SURFACE COMPONENTS
The SDC receives and processes information from the sub-sea installation. Its display provides
clear information to help you guide the ROV along the course of the target.
Simultaneously, the SDC makes the same survey information available at one of its serial ports
for recording by an external data logger.
2 System Overview
DPN 402197 Issue 2.1 TSS (UK) Limited Page 2-5 of 14
Figure 22: Surface Display Computer
The main functions of the SDC are:
To communicate with the sub-sea installation.
You may adjust links inside the SDC and inside the SEP to select among three available
communication methods. Refer to sub-section 4.2.2.1 for instructions to make these
changes.
To configure and control the 350 System.
The SDC uses the Windows 2000 operating environment. Within that DeepView for Win-
dows software is used to configure the System after installation, and to operate the System
during a survey. Refer to Sections 5 and 6 for full instructions to use this software.
To display the survey measurements graphically.
The display on the SDC shows information that helps you to guide the ROV along the
course of the target. Refer to Section 6 for a description of the display features.
There are two options that are available to display information on an external video moni-
tor. The first is to repeat the SDC display at a remote location using SVGA signals pro-
vided on a 15-way high density D-type connector. The second is the video overlay which
is transmitted as composite video or S-Video in either PAL or NTSC. Refer to sub-section
4.2.4 for instructions to use this feature.
To send the acquired data to an external data logger.
The SDC allows you to log survey data externally (for use by post-processing engineers)
and internally (to provide a simple record of the survey that you may replay through the
SDC).
You may also use the SDC and DeepView for Windows software to control a Dualtrack instal-
lation. Refer to Appendix B for details.
The SDC is a ruggedised IBM-compatible computer mounted in a purpose-designed shock
protecting transit case. The design of the transit case allows you to operate the SDC by remov-
ing the front and the rear access panels. Alternatively, you may remove the SDC from the tran-
sit case and mount it in a 19-inch instrument rack if this arrangement is more appropriate.
350 Cable Survey System
Page 2-6 of 14 TSS (UK) Limited Issue 2.1 DPN 402197
Refer to sub-section 3.1 for full instructions to install the SDC.
Pay particular attention to the warning and caution notices that are included within the
SDC installation instructions.
The SDC has an integral alphanumeric and function key pad and a trackpad. You may use
these tactile membrane key pads to enter commands and System configuration parameters. For
convenience, you may also connect an external keyboard and a pointing device such as a
mouse or trackball to the SDC. The System does not include external pointing device or key-
board.
The SDC uses a 15 inch flat panel colour display.
Figure 23: SDC control features
Figure 23 shows the SDC front panel with its alphanumeric and function key pads, trackpad
and flat panel screen. The fold-down panel on the SDC covers the power switch, the 3-inch
floppy disk drive, the CD-ROM drive, the Power, Hard drive and Current loop indicator
lights, a USB port, and a PS2 connection port for an external keyboard. To open this panel,
operate the lock and swing the panel down on its hinge.
When TSS (UK) Limited dispatches the 350 System, the SDC will have the current version of
the DeepView graphical display software pre-loaded onto its hard disk. Refer to Sections 5
and 6 for instructions to use this operating software.
7 8 9 /
4 5 6
1 2 3
0
. = +
A B C
E F G
I J K
M N O
Q R S
U V W
Y Z
Space
ENTER
Back
Space
Upper
D
H
L
P
T
X
Shift
2 System Overview
DPN 402197 Issue 2.1 TSS (UK) Limited Page 2-7 of 14
CAUTION
You may adversely and seriously affect the operating functions of the 350 System if
you load unauthorised software onto the SDC hard disk, or if you attempt to use such
software with the SDC. You will invalidate the warranty if you attempt to install or use
unauthorised software with the SDC.
Do not load any unauthorised software onto the SDC. If you are in any doubt about the
SDC software, contact TSS for advice.
CAUTION
You might destroy logged data and program files on the SDC if you allow computer
viruses to infect the unit.
Computer viruses can pass from one computer to another when you transfer files,
either directly through a cable or by disk. To protect the SDC against this type of dam-
age, always take the following precautions:
Never try to use unauthorised software with the SDC.
Never power-on or reset the SDC with a diskette loaded into its floppy disk drive or CD
loaded into its CD-ROM drive.
Use an external PC running up-to-date anti-virus software to check diskettes or CDs
before you use them with the SDC. Use only virus-free diskette or CDs with the SDC.
You may install appropriate and approved virus protection software on the SDC if you
prefer. To maintain full effectiveness you must keep this type of protection up to date.
Do not use any diskette or CDs with the SDC if you are unsure whether it is free from
viruses.
DO NOT power-on the SDC if you suspect a virus has infected it.
TSS takes every possible precaution to prevent virus infection before shipment. If you
suspect your SDC has become virus infected, contact TSS for advice and then arrange
to return the SDC to TSS for repair.
The SDC accepts an AC electrical supply in the range 85 to 265V (47 to 63Hz) through a 3-pin
IEC power inlet port. The SDC will configure itself automatically to the appropriate electrical
supply when you power-on the unit.
350 Cable Survey System
Page 2-8 of 14 TSS (UK) Limited Issue 2.1 DPN 402197
2.4 SUB-SEA COMPONENTS
The sub-sea installation comprises the following component parts:
A Sub-sea Electronics Pod (SEP)
A coil array with six identical sensing coils arranged in two coil triads
Frame components to mount the coils onto the ROV
A sub-sea altimeter
Cables to interconnect the sub-sea components of the 350 System and to connect them to
the ROV electrical distribution system.
2.4.1 Sub-sea Electronics Pod
The SEP performs several functions:
Power supply conditioning for the sub-sea components of the 350 System
High-speed data acquisition and digital signal processing
Data acquisition from a sub-sea altimeter connected to the SEP Altimeter port
Calculation of all target co-ordinates
Communication with the SDC through the ROV umbilical using whichever communica-
tion method you have established for the System.
Non-volatile memory within the SEP stores certain installation-specific parameters that the
SEP needs. You may examine and change these configuration parameters remotely from the
SDC refer to Section 6.2 for instructions to configure the System.
EPROM memory devices within the SEP store the software that controls all the SEP functions.
There are two versions of the SEP available that differ only in their electrical supply require-
ments. A label on the SEP identifies the electrical supply required by the unit:
The standard SEP operates from a single phase AC electrical supply (45 to 65Hz) in the
range 110V to 120V (maximum power demand 3.1A when used in a Dualtrack installa-
tion).There is a 2A quickblow fuse on the PSU Board inside the SEP. You must provide
additional fuse protection for the equipment by fitting a 3.15A quickblow fuse between pin
3 of the Power/Comms cable and the supply live. Refer to sub-section 4.1.3.1 for instruc-
tions to connect power to the SEP.
Optionally, TSS can supply a SEP configured to operate from a single phase AC electrical
supply (45 to 65Hz) in the range 220V to 240V (maximum power demand 1.8A when used
in a Dualtrack installation). You must include a 2A quickblow fuse in between pin 3 of the
Power/Comms cable and the supply live if your System uses a 240V nominal electrical
supply.
2 System Overview
DPN 402197 Issue 2.1 TSS (UK) Limited Page 2-9 of 14
CAUTION
You might damage the SEP if you attempt to operate it from an incorrect electrical sup-
ply. Pay careful attention to the requirements of the SEP and provide a supply of the
correct rating.
A switched-mode supply inside the SEP generates the conditioned and stabilised DC supplies
required by the sub-sea electronics. The input to the switched mode supply includes a line fuse
accessible inside the SEP.
The SEP is a sealed unit with six ports:
On one end-cap:
Power/comms.
This port accepts the AC electrical supply from the ROV. It also carries the communication
signals that pass between the sub-sea installation and the SDC.
Altimeter.
You may connect the TSS or the Datasonics sub-sea altimeter directly to this port. The port
provides DC power to operate these types of altimeter and a signal path for their RS232
communications.
Aux Output.
You must use this port to connect the 350 SEP to the 440 System if you intend to use your
350 System in a Dualtrack installation. Refer to Appendix B for a description of the Dual-
track System. If you do not make any electrical connections to the Aux Output port you
must leave the blanking plug securely attached to it.
Sensor
The 350 System does not use this port. Leave the blanking plug securely attached to the
Sensor port.
On the other end-cap:
There are two electrically identical connection ports for connection to the two coil triads. You
must connect each coil to its correct port on the SEP. Refer to sub-section 4.1.4 for instruc-
tions to connect the coils.
CAUTION
You might damage the SEP if you leave any port exposed to sea water during deploy-
ment on the ROV, even if you are not using the 350 System.
You must fit the supplied blanking plugs to any port on the SEP that you will not be
using during ROV deployment.
Refer to sub-section 3.2.1 for instructions to install the SEP on the ROV.
350 Cable Survey System
Page 2-10 of 14 TSS (UK) Limited Issue 2.1 DPN 402197
Important hardware and software differences exist between the Type 1 and the Type 2
SEP and these units are NOT interchangeable. You may identify the Type 2 SEP
described throughout this Manual by the AUX OUTPUT port on one end-cap. The
Type 1 SEP does not include this port.
Contact TSS for advice if you wish to upgrade an existing Type 1 System to a Type 2
System so that you may use it within a Dualtrack installation. Refer to Appendix B for a
description of the Dualtrack System.
2.4.2 Sensing Coils
TSS supplies the coil triads already assembled and ready for you to install on the ROV. Labels
identify each triad as either the port or the starboard unit you must install the coil triads on
their correct side of the ROV.
During a cable survey, the signals detected by the coils might fall to extremely low levels (less
than 5V). To improve the overall signal-to-noise ratio received by the SEP, each sensing coil
has a low-noise pre-amplifier built into its connector assembly.
CAUTION
TSS matches the coils and their pre-amplifiers carefully during manufacture. The indi-
vidual coils have no user-serviceable parts inside. DO NOT open the coils or remove
their connector assemblies for any reason.
During the manufacturing process, TSS calibrates each coil carefully with its associated pre-
amplifier. The coils require no further calibration after manufacture.
The measurement process of the 350 Cable Survey System relies upon triangulation using the
coil separation distance and information derived from the received signals. For this process to
work accurately you must install and connect the coils correctly. Refer to sub-section 3.2.2 for
important instructions on how to construct the coil triads and mount them on an ROV.
2 System Overview
DPN 402197 Issue 2.1 TSS (UK) Limited Page 2-11 of 14
2.4.2.1 Sensing Coil Components
Figure 24 shows the components of a single coil triad. Note that you will use an additional
clamp and bolts to secure the coil triad to the mounting bar see sub-section 3.2.2.2 for
details. Figure 24 does not show the additional clamp and bolts.
Figure 24: Components of a coil triad
See Section 3 for full instructions to assemble the coils and mount them onto an ROV.
W The coil triad consists of a central alignment support block and three separate clamps W, all manufac-
tured from nylon.
WW

All sensing coils in the array are nominally identical, with any slight differences compensated by a calibration
procedure during manufacture. The windings of the sensing coils W are inside sealed cylinders. To maintain
the correct relative positions of the coils, each cylinder has a recess machined into its surface that engages
with a locating screw in the alignment support block. The clamps W and their bolts W secure the three
coils into the alignment support block. Additional horizontal and vertical grooves machined into the block allow
you to mount the assembled coil triad onto the support bar.
W
W
The standard connection cable is 4 metres long. Three 8-way connectors W terminate the cable and allow
connection to the sensing coils. A single 12-way connector W allows connection to the SEP. The cable splice
is inside a sealed junction , which has mounting holes so that you may attach it to the coil mounting bar.
350 Cable Survey System
Page 2-12 of 14 TSS (UK) Limited Issue 2.1 DPN 402197
2.4.3 Altimeter
The main function of the 350 System is to locate and survey a target laying on or buried
beneath the seabed.
If the 350 System measures the altitude of its coil array above the seabed, then it can also
deliver a good estimation of the depth of target cover. A sub-sea altimeter can supply such alti-
tude measurements to the 350 System.
You should remember that an altimeter measures to a point on the seabed directly
beneath its transducer face. This single-point measurement may not be the same as
the local mean seabed level.
This means that uneven seabed topography might degrade the quality and accuracy of
depth of cover measurements derived using a single altimeter.
For surveys where you must measure an accurate and certifiable target burial depth,
you should use an independent seabed profiling system. Log the measurements from
such a system separately and then use the post-processing operation to merge them
with data acquired by the 350 System.
On some types of tracked ROV, you may arrange to keep the coil array of the 350 System at a
fixed height above the seabed. In these circumstances, you could avoid the need for an altime-
ter by configuring the SDC to use a fixed coil height.
The standard 350 System includes a sub-sea altimeter. You will need to install this unit on the
ROV frame close to the centre of the coil array. Refer to sub-section 3.2.3 for instructions to
install the altimeter on the ROV, and sub-section 4.1.5 for instructions to connect it directly to
the SEP.
Refer to Section 6.2.2.1 for instructions to configure the altimeter after installation.
2.4.3.1 Alternative Altimeter Types.
If you cannot connect the TSS or the Datasonics altimeter directly to the SEP for any reason,
the SDC can accept serial data from the alternative units listed in sub-section 4.1.5.
If you use an alternative type of altimeter, you must provide a separate power supply to operate
it. You must also connect its RS232 signals to an available SDC serial communication port.
Because the RS232 signals from the altimeter are for use over distances of only 15 metres, you
must use an existing multiplexed link between the ROV and the surface vessel to carry your
altimeter signals to the SDC.
Refer to sub-section 4.1.5.2 for instructions to connect an altimeter to the SDC.
Refer to Section 5 for instructions to configure the altimeter after installation.
2 System Overview
DPN 402197 Issue 2.1 TSS (UK) Limited Page 2-13 of 14
2.4.4 Remotely Operated Vehicles
The type and size of ROV you use for a survey will depend on the specific application and on
the capabilities of the survey vessel.
You may deploy the 350 System on a wide range of ROVs including:
Free-flying ROVs of differing size and type
Tracked ROVs or crawlers
Trenching ploughs
Towed sleds
See Section 3 for detailed instructions and recommendations concerning the physical installa-
tion of the sub-sea components of the 350 System.
350 Cable Survey System
Page 2-14 of 14 TSS (UK) Limited Issue 2.1 DPN 402197
3 Physical Installation
DPN 402197 Issue 2.1 TSS (UK) Limited Page 3-1 of 14
3 PHYSICAL INSTALLATION
This section of the Manual explains how to install the surface and the sub-sea components of
the TSS 350 System.
During the installation procedure, you should make a written record of certain parameters and
retain them with the survey log for reference during the post-processing operation. The Deep-
View display software on the SDC allows you to examine the System parameters and to create
a printed copy that you may retain with the survey records.
There are many different types and size of survey vessel and ROV and it would be impossible
for this Manual to cover all installation possibilities. The instructions in this section therefore
represent a set of general guidelines and recommendations that experience has proved effec-
tive.
IMPORTANT
Note that you cannot regard certain aspects of the 350 installation procedure as
optional: The instructions relating to coil location, orientation and mounting configura-
tion are of critical importance to the successful operation of the 350 System. You must
follow these instructions.
3.1 SDC Installation Page 2
You may use the SDC while it remains mounted in the shock-protecting transit case, or you
may install the SDC in a 19-inch instrument rack. You should install the SDC where you can
see and operate it easily.
3.2 Sub-sea Installation Page 3
The success of any survey performed by the 350 System relies heavily on the care you exercise
when you install its sub-sea components.
3.3 Installation Check List Page 13
This post-installation checklist helps you to avoid some common errors and omissions when
you install the 350 System.
350 Cable Survey System
Page 3-2 of 14 TSS (UK) Limited Issue 2.1 DPN 402197
3.1 SDC INSTALLATION
WARNING
You must take precautions to secure the SDC when you store and operate this unit in
its transit case.
Protect personnel from the hazard of falling equipment and protect the unit from dam-
age when the survey vessel moves due to the action of waves.
Install cables away from walkways and secure them so they do not present a hazard to
personnel.
CAUTION
To avoid potential damage to the SDC, make certain it has sufficient ventilation to dissi-
pate the heat that it generates during normal operation.
If you mount the SDC in a 19-inch instrument rack you must allow a minimum 30mm
clearance between the top of the SDC and any other equipment mounted directly above
it in the rack. Also, allow a minimum 100mm space between the SDC rear panel and the
rear of the instrument rack to allow for connectors and cable routing
The SDC is a ruggedised IBM-compatible computer supplied by TSS in a shock-protecting
transit case. You may operate the SDC in this transit case, or you may install it into a 19-inch
shock-protecting instrument rack. TSS does not supply the fixings that you will need to install
the SDC in a 19-inch instrument rack.
If you intend to change the communication method used by the 350 System, make the
necessary changes to the SDC before you install it into the instrument rack. Refer to
sub-section 4.2.2 for instructions to change the SDC communication method.
The SDC transit case has removable front and rear access panels. If you operate the SDC in its
transit case, you must remove both these panels to allow effective ventilation and heat dissipa-
tion.
CAUTION
You might damage the SDC if you allow it to overheat. To operate the SDC inside its
transit case, release and remove the front and the rear access panels of the transit case
to allow effective ventilation and heat dissipation.
Although the SDC uses solid state electronics, the hard-disk drive and parts of the display
panel are susceptible to damage through shock or sustained vibration. You must therefore
exercise some care when you select a suitable location for this unit:
Install the SDC where you have easy access to the controls. Choose a position for the SDC
that allows you to see the screen easily while you operate the ROV.
If you do not mount the SDC in an instrument rack, use the original SDC transit case to
provide shock protection for the unit. Secure the transit case so that it cannot slide or fall
with movements of the vessel.
3 Physical Installation
DPN 402197 Issue 2.1 TSS (UK) Limited Page 3-3 of 14
Make certain there is sufficient ventilation space above the SDC to remove the heat that it
generates during normal operation. If necessary, use an electric fan to provide additional
ventilation.
Do not subject the SDC to extremes of temperature or humidity, or to severe vibration or
electrical noise. Never allow the SDC to become wet.
Obey the environmental limits listed in sub-section 8.1.1 when you store and operate
the SDC.
3.2 SUB-SEA INSTALLATION
The care that you take when you install the sub-sea components of the 350 System will have a
significant influence on the accuracy of survey data. Read the following instructions carefully
and ensure that you have all the necessary parts and tools available before you attempt to
install the System.
The following instructions apply only to the standard components of the sub-sea installation.
3.2.1 SEP
The sub-sea electronics pod has a hard anodised aluminium housing to ensure its specified
depth rating. Do not open the SEP during the installation procedure unless you need to change
the communication method used by the System. Sub-section 4.2.2.1 explains how to change
the communication method.
If you need to open the SEP to set a different communication method, do this before
you install the SEP on board the ROV. To preserve the seals, always follow the instruc-
tions to disassemble and reassemble the SEP housing carefully. You will find these
instructions in sub-section 9.2.2.
There is a nylon mounting block attached to the SEP. This block provides a safe and secure
method to mount the housing to the ROV frame.
CAUTION
You might damage the anodised surface of the SEP housing if you attempt to secure it
to the ROV without using the proper mounting block. Corrosion will occur rapidly if you
damage the protective anodising of the SEP housing.
Do not remove the mounting block from the SEP housing. Do not attempt to secure the
SEP housing directly to the ROV framework without using the mounting block
The mounting block has machined slots that allow you to strap the complete housing and
block assembly firmly to the ROV frame. Stainless steel strapping is ideal for this purpose. See
Figure 31 below for details.
It is safe to mount the SEP in any orientation.
350 Cable Survey System
Page 3-4 of 14 TSS (UK) Limited Issue 2.1 DPN 402197
Mount the SEP housing according to the following guidelines:
Eliminate any possibility of snagging or damage to the SEP housing by installing it inside
the outer limits of the ROV frame.
Locate the SEP housing so that you may install the cables easily between the sub-assem-
blies of the 350 System.
Do not apply sharp bends or other mechanical stresses to the cables during installation or
operation. Route the cables between the components of the sub-sea installation, and use
plastic clips to secure them to the ROV frame.
On small ROVs, position the SEP close to the centre of buoyancy to avoid upsetting the
ROV trim.
Tighten the mounting straps firmly so that the SEP housing cannot move under the influ-
ence of ROV vibration or currents in the water.
Refer to sub-section 4.1 for instructions to make the electrical connections between the
sub-sea components.
Figure 31: SEP mounting arrangement
3 Physical Installation
DPN 402197 Issue 2.1 TSS (UK) Limited Page 3-5 of 14
3.2.2 Sensing Coils
Each sensing coil in the array detects the alternating magnetic fields associated with the tone
current in the cable, and supplies an output voltage to the SEP proportional in amplitude to the
received magnetic field strength. Because the output voltage is derived from the tone on the
cable, it is at the same frequency. Circuitry within each sensing coil applies signal condition-
ing and pre-amplification.
CAUTION
The waterproof characteristics of the coils might degrade if you open them.
The pre-amplifier boards contain no user-serviceable parts. To avoid degrading the
depth rating of the sensing coils, do not remove their end-caps.
All vertical range measurements to the target position are relative to the coil reference line.
This line, shown in Figure 32, joins the centres of the port and the starboard lateral coils.
Measurements of lateral offset are relative to the centre of the coil array and are positive if the
target is to starboard and negative if it is to port.
Figure 32: The coil array reference line
350 Cable Survey System
Page 3-6 of 14 TSS (UK) Limited Issue 2.1 DPN 402197
3.2.2.1 Assembling the Coils
TSS dispatches the 350 System with both coil triads already assembled.
Labels identify the port and starboard coil triads and indicate their correct mounting
orientation. The coil triads are NOT interchangeable. You MUST install them on the
ROV in their proper orientation. This installation detail is critical to the correct opera-
tion of the 350 System.
There are two numbers stamped onto the brass end cap of each sensing coil. These numbers
are the four-digit serial number and the five-digit calibration constant. Record these numbers
for use during the System configuration procedure described in sub-section 6.2.2. Appendix D
includes a suitable form to record these important details.
You will need to refer to the following coil re-assembly instructions only if you have disas-
sembled a coil triad for example to fit a new a sensing coil.
If the coil assemblies are both complete as supplied by TSS, mount them on the ROV as
instructed in sub-section 3.2.2.2.
To re-construct the coils after you have disassembled them you will need:
An area of clear deck space at the front of the ROV
A 3mm hexagonal key
A 6mm hexagonal key
When you reassemble a coil triad, you MUST follow these instructions carefully. You
cannot expect the 350 System to deliver accurate survey measurements unless you re-
construct the coil triads correctly.
3 Physical Installation
DPN 402197 Issue 2.1 TSS (UK) Limited Page 3-7 of 14
Figure 33: Construction of the starboard coil triad
The following instructions describe the construction of the starboard coil triad (the port coil
triad is a mirror image of this). Refer to Figure 33.
1. Place the centre support block on a clear, flat deck-space. Turn the block so that there is
a groove running left-to-right on the top face as shown in Figure 33.
Fit the lateral coil first:
2. Insert an M5 12mm screw W into the hole near the centre of the top groove. Use a 3mm
hexagonal key to tighten the screw lightly.
3. Turn the lateral coil W so that the 8-way connector is towards the left-hand side of the cen-
tre block as shown. Place the coil into the groove so that the head of the M5 screw engages
with the recess in the coil body.
4. Place a clamping block W against the coil and insert four M8 50mm bolts . Use a
6mm hexagonal key to tighten the bolts evenly until the block supports the coil properly.
Do not over tighten these bolts.
Fit the fore-aft coil:
5. Insert an M5 12mm screw into the right-hand groove of the centre block. Use a 3mm
hexagonal key to tighten the screw lightly.
350 Cable Survey System
Page 3-8 of 14 TSS (UK) Limited Issue 2.1 DPN 402197
6. Turn the fore-aft coil W so that it is to the right-hand side of the centre block with its
8-way connector pointing towards you as shown in Figure 33. Fit the coil to the groove so
that the head of the M5 screw engages with the recess in the coil body. If necessary, tilt the
assembly to the left to prevent the coil falling from the groove.
7. Place a clamping block W against the coil and insert four M8 50mm bolts. Use a 6mm
hexagonal key to tighten the bolts evenly until the block supports the coil properly. Do not
over tighten these bolts.
Fit the vertical coil:
8. Insert an M5 12mm screw into the vertical support groove that is farthest from you and
use a 3mm hexagonal key to tighten the screw lightly.
9. Turn the vertical coil so that the 8-way connector is at the top. Fit the coil to the groove
so that the head of the M5 screw engages with the recess in the coil body. If necessary, tilt
the assembly forward slightly to prevent the coil falling from the groove.
10. Place a clamping block W against the coil and insert four M8 50mm bolts. Use a 6mm
hexagonal key to tighten the bolts evenly until the block supports the coil properly. Do not
over tighten these bolts.
This completes construction of the starboard coil triad.
Assemble the port coil triad in the same order. Note that the port coil triad is a mirror image of
the starboard:
The lateral coil must be oriented and assembled with its 8-way connector pointing to the
right.
The fore-aft coil must be located in the left-hand side of the centre block during assembly,
with its 8-way connector pointing towards you.
3 Physical Installation
DPN 402197 Issue 2.1 TSS (UK) Limited Page 3-9 of 14
3.2.2.2 Mounting the Coils
Figure 34: Coil mounting components
WARNING
The coil triads are heavy. To avoid personal injury, always use help when you lift or
move the assembled coil array.
CAUTION
If you mount the 350 System on the same ROV as a
TSS 440 Pipe and Cable Survey System.
With drive current applied to the search-coils of the 440 System, large induced volt-
ages can appear across the sensing coils of the 350 System.
Later versions of the 350 sensing coils included diode protection to avoid damage to
the coil preamplifiers. Refer to Appendix B.2 for details.
The accuracy of measurements made by the 350 System might degrade if any of the
following affect the characteristics of the electromagnetic field radiated from the target:
The proximity of any material that is more conductive than the seawater. This includes a
metal or carbon-fibre ROV frame.
The proximity of any large magnet such as that of an actuator.
The presence of any conductive material between the coil triads that electrically short-
ens the coil separation distance.
It is not possible to predict how the measurements will degrade when any of these
effects is present. To help avoid these effects, mount the coil triads at least 0.5 metres
from the ROV body.
The sensing coil triads are heavy. Ensure the mounting arrangements provide a rigid and
sturdy support to prevent the array moving or vibrating independently of the ROV.
Mount the coils on the front of the ROV at a height that protects them from collision damage
without degrading their vertical detection range. Typically, they will be approximately one
2160mm
2130mm
1290mm
240mm
390mm 390mm
240mm
870mm 870mm
900mm 900mm
2130mm
Tie Bar
Mounting Strip
Outrigger
2160mm
350 Cable Survey System
Page 3-10 of 14 TSS (UK) Limited Issue 2.1 DPN 402197
metre above the lowest point on the ROV. Allow a minimum distance of 0.5 metres between
the coil triads and the ROV body.
Figure 34 shows the coil mounting kit with the following items:
A mounting bar 2.0 metres long with a cross-section 72 70mm.
There are flat surfaces machined into the bar. These extend for a distance of 500mm from
both ends so that, in these areas, the bar has an octagonal cross-section.
The bar has a receptacle groove 170mm long machined at the centre of one face. Make
certain this receptacle is at the bottom when you install the bar onto the ROV. The recepta-
cle is there to accept a small TSS altimeter if the System includes one.
Two clamping blocks identical to those used in the coil assembly (item W in Figure 33).
Eight M8 50mm A4 stainless steel bolts. These are identical to items in Figure 33.
Coil mounting method:
Note that when properly mounted both coil triads have:
Their vertical coils towards the front of the ROV, with their connectors at the top.
Their fore-aft coils farthest from the ROV centre-line with their connectors pointing
towards the rear.
Their lateral coils in the top groove of the centre block, with their connectors pointing
inboard.
1. Use stainless steel U-bolts to attach the mounting bar to the front of the ROV. Adjust the
mounting bar until it is level and centred relative to the ROV. Tighten the U-bolts firmly to
stop the bar moving or vibrating during survey operations.
2. Fit the port coil triad to the port end of the mounting bar where the machined flats give the
bar an octagonal cross section. Locate the coil assembly so that the mounting bar engages
in the lateral groove at the bottom of the centre support block. The coil triad will be a
very tight fit against the mounting bar and might be difficult to install. There are
arrows on the coil identification label to show the forward direction of the coil triad.
3. Use a clamping block to secure the bottom of the port coil triad to the mounting bar. Use a
6mm hexagonal key to tighten the four M8 bolts lightly. Do not tighten these bolts fully
until you have installed the complete coil array and you have set the coil separation dis-
tance.
4. Follow the same procedure explained in paragraphs 2 and 3 above and fit the starboard coil
triad to the starboard end of the mounting bar.
5. The design of the mounting bar allows you to adjust the distance between the coil triads
anywhere from approximately 1 metre to nearly 2 metres while maintaining their correct
alignment.
3 Physical Installation
DPN 402197 Issue 2.1 TSS (UK) Limited Page 3-11 of 14
Slide the two coil triads on the mounting bar until they are at the correct separation distance
(between 1m and 1.76m). Make certain the coils are equally spaced about the ROV centre line.
Tighten all the securing bolts of both clamping blocks evenly. Do not over tighten these
bolts.
The coil identification labels have reference marks
to simplify measurement of the coil separation
distance. Measure and record the distance
between the reference marks so that you may con-
figure the DeepView with this important informa-
tion.
Also, record the serial numbers and calibration
constants for each of the six sensing coils. You
will find these numbers stamped on the brass end caps of the individual sensing coils.
Refer to sub-section 4.1.4 for instructions to complete the electrical installation of the coil tri-
ads.
Appendix C includes an example of a form that you may use to record the coil separation dis-
tance, the coil serial numbers and their calibration constants. This is important information
that you must use to configure the 350 System correctly.
3.2.3 Altimeter Installation
When you use an altimeter with the 350 System, install it according to the following guide-
lines:
Install the altimeter as close as possible to the centre of the coil array.
Make certain the altimeter has a clear vertical view to the seabed across its entire beam
width.
When you select a position for the altimeter, make allowance for its minimum measure-
ment range capability.
Measure and record any vertical offset between the transducer face of the altimeter and the
reference line of the coil array (as defined in Figure 32). You will use this information to
configure the display software.
Use stainless steel clips to secure the altimeter to the ROV frame so that it does not move
or vibrate independently.
Do not install the altimeter at the opposite end of the ROV to the coils. If you do not follow
this advice, there is a possibility that the survey data will contain errors caused by pitch of
the ROV or uneven seabed topography. See the explanation below for details.
Errors can arise in the measurement of depth of cover caused by horizontal offset between the
altimeter and the centre of the coil array. In the example shown in Figure 35 there are altime-
ters located at A and B. Because of the seabed topography beneath the ROV, both altime-
ters supply totally different measurements of altitude. Note that, although the measurements of
FORWARD FORWARD
PORT
TOP
Coil separation reference
350 Cable Survey System
Page 3-12 of 14 TSS (UK) Limited Issue 2.1 DPN 402197
target position supplied by the 350 System remain accurate, errors in depth of cover measure-
ments will vary according to the altimeter position and the seabed topography.
Figure 35: Effects of altimeter horizontal offset
The SDC display software cannot compensate for any horizontal offset that exists
between the altimeter and the centre of the coil array. You should install the altimeter
near the centre of the coil array in both the lateral and the fore-aft directions.
IMPORTANT
The altimeter provides information that is valid only for a point immediately beneath its
transducer face. When you survey over uneven seabed, TSS strongly recommends that
you use a scanning profiling system to determine the accurate seabed level.
With the altimeter mounted correctly, the 350 System will provide additional information and
features:
It will supply accurate depth of cover measurements with the target centred under the coils.
It will be able to operate in the Forward Search mode. In this mode, the System can esti-
mate the range to a target that lies along an intersecting course ahead of the ROV. See Sec-
tion 6 for relevant details of the SDC display software, and refer to Appendix A for a
detailed description of the principle of forward range measurement.
3 Physical Installation
DPN 402197 Issue 2.1 TSS (UK) Limited Page 3-13 of 14
3.3 INSTALLATION CHECK LIST
Follow all the installation instructions in this Manual carefully.
Mount the coil triads in the correct orientation and in the correct place on board the ROV.
Ensure the coil array is central on the ROV.
Protect the coil array from collision damage by mounting it approximately one metre
above the lowest point on the ROV.
Make certain there is at least 0.5 metres clearance between the coils and the ROV body.
Do not allow any free movement in the coil triads, the SEP, the altimeter or the cables.
Always use the nylon mounting block when you install the SEP.
When you select a location to install the altimeter, consider its minimum range measure-
ment specification.
Avoid installing your altimeter where there is a significant horizontal offset distance
between it and the coil array. Make certain there is less than 1.0 metres vertical offset
between the altimeter and the coil array.
Record all installation-specific configuration details in the Survey Log.
350 Cable Survey System
Page 3-14 of 14 TSS (UK) Limited Issue 2.1 DPN 402197
4 Electrical Installation
DPN 402197 Issue 2.1 TSS (UK) Limited Page 4-1 of 18
4 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
This section of the Manual explains how to connect the SDC and the sub-sea components of
the standard 350 System. You should attempt the electrical installation only after you have fol-
lowed the instructions in Section 3 to install the sub-assemblies of the 350 System.
Also included in this section are detailed instructions that tell you how to change the commu-
nication method used between the SDC and the SEP.
The standard 350 System uses 2-wire current-loop communications. To select an alter-
native communication method you must change the settings of links inside the SEP
and the SDC.
If you need to change the communication method you must make the necessary link
adjustments inside the SEP before you mount it onto the ROV.
4.1 Sub-sea Components Page 2
To gain the best performance from the 350 System, you must interconnect the sub-sea compo-
nents of the System properly. This sub-section explains how to do this.
Refer to Appendix B for instructions to connect the System as part of a Dualtrack installation.
4.2 Surface Display Computer Page 10
The SDC includes the DeepView for Windows graphical display and logging software that
allows you to configure and control the 350 System.
This sub-section explains the mandatory and optional connections to the SDC. It also explains
how to change the communication method between the surface and the sub-sea components of
the 350 System.
350 Cable Survey System
Page 4-2 of 18 TSS (UK) Limited Issue 2.1 DPN 402197
7 8 9 /
4 5 6
1 2 3
0 . = +
A B C
E F G
I J K
M N O
Q R S
U V W
Y Z Space
ENTER Back Space Upper
D
H
L
P
T
X
Shift
4.1 SUB-SEA COMPONENTS
WARNING
There is a risk of death or serious injury by electric shock when you work on the electri-
cal distribution system of the ROV. Only a competent engineer who has the relevant
training and experience must make any connections to the ROV electrical distribution
system.
Power-off the ROV and isolate the mains electrical supply before you connect the 350
System to the electrical distribution system. Observe all relevant local and national
safety regulations while you work on the ROV and on the 350 System.
Do not reconnect the mains electrical supply to the ROV or to the 350 System until you
have completed all work and you have fitted all safety covers and ground connections.
This sub-section explains how to complete the electrical installation of the sub-sea compo-
nents.
Figure 41: System interconnection diagram
4 Electrical Installation
DPN 402197 Issue 2.1 TSS (UK) Limited Page 4-3 of 18
4.1.1 Ground Connections
CAUTION
To prevent severe corrosion of the sub-sea components, you must make adequate
grounding provisions for them. If corrosion occurs throughout the System, perform-
ance will degrade and eventual catastrophic failure will occur.
You must provide a good ground connection at sea water potential on pin number 2 of
the 8-way Power/Comms port of the SEP. Use good waterproof connectors or splices
to make the connection.
If you provide the 350 System with an inadequate ground connection, parts of the System will
act as sacrificial anodes and will slowly decay during sub-sea operations. This will occur
whether or not you use the 350 System.
To prevent corrosion affecting the System in this way, you must connect pin 2 of the 8-way
SEP Power/Comms port locally to the ROV using a ground connection at sea water potential.
IMPORTANT
To ground the SEP use only a local grounding point on the ROV frame. Do not use a
core within the umbilical to ground the 350 System because there will inevitably be a
potential difference between the ROV and the surface vessel.
These grounding provisions hold the 350 System at the same electrical potential as the sea
water. This prevents the occurrence of electrochemical action between the System and the sea
water and minimises galvanic corrosion.

The SDC accepts an AC electrical supply in the range 85 to 265V (47 to 63Hz). The power demand is approxi-
mately 250VA.
W
Data communications from the SDC to the ROV umbilical. These can be 2-wire or 4-wire 20mA digital current loop,
or RS232. The default configuration is 2-wire 20mA digital current loop.
W
Power and communications cable (or ROV Tail) from the ROV to the SEP. This cable has cores to carry the com-
munication signals that pass between the SEP and the SDC, and power cores for connection to the ROV electrical
distribution system. Refer to Table 41 for details of the cable.
The maximum current drawn from the supply is approximately 3.1A (at 110V to 120V AC) when the SEP is
installed within a TSS Dualtrack System. When operating as a stand-alone 350 System, the SEP draws approxi-
mately 0.3A from a 110V to 120V AC supply.
W
All sub-sea connections are to sealed ports on the SEP. You must fit a proper blanking plug to any port that does
not have a connector before you deploy the System underwater.

The coil connection cables each have a single 12-way connector for connection to the SEP, and three 8-way right-
angled connectors for connection to the detection coils. You must connect the three short branches of the cables to
the correct coils in each triad as identified by their attached labels vertical, lateral and fore-aft.

There are three identical detection coils in each triad. Note the serial number and calibration code on each coil to
check that the SDC software includes the correct details.
W
Figure 41 shows the altimeter cable connecting directly to the SEP. You may connect the RS232 signals from the
altimeter to the ROV multiplexer and pass them independently through the umbilical to the surface vessel. If you
use this method, extract the signal from the demultiplexer and apply them to the COM2 serial port on the SDC.
W
You may connect the TSS or Datasonics altimeter types directly to the SEP at the Altimeter port as shown. You
may use other types of altimeter with the System if you prefer.
350 Cable Survey System
Page 4-4 of 18 TSS (UK) Limited Issue 2.1 DPN 402197
4.1.2 Care of Sub-sea Connectors
To ensure reliable operation and to extend the life of the sub-sea installation, take the follow-
ing precautions to care for the sub-sea connectors used throughout the 350 System:
1. Keep both the connector and socket free from debris and salt build up.
2. Use soap and clean fresh water to wash the connectors, and then rinse them with isopropyl
alcohol (IPA). Allow the connectors to dry thoroughly in air before you reassemble them.
Lubricate the mating face of the connectors with a very light spray of 3M Silicone Oil or Dow
Corning #111 valve lubricant or equivalent. Do not use grease.
CAUTION
Some silicone lubricants will crystallise when you subject them to sea water under
pressure. When this happens, the seals of the connector will degrade and allow water
to penetrate.
To avoid damage to the connectors, use only the lubricant oils mentioned above, or
equivalent oils that the manufacturer approves specifically for use on deep-sea con-
nectors and seals. When you apply the lubricant oil, use a very thin coating only.
4.1.3 Sub-sea Electronics Pod
The SEP performs all the following functions:
Supplying power for the sub-sea installation
Signal processing
Calculating the target co-ordinates
Communicating with a sub-sea altimeter connected directly to the SEP
Communicating with the SDC through the ROV umbilical
Interfacing with the TSS 440 Pipe and Cable Survey Systems (when you use the 350 Sys-
tem within a Dualtrack installation).
The SEP has six ports that allow connection to the various sub-sea components of the installa-
tion.
On one end cap:
Port coil triad connection
Starboard coil triad connection
4 Electrical Installation
DPN 402197 Issue 2.1 TSS (UK) Limited Page 4-5 of 18
On the other end cap:
Power input and communications link
Altimeter connection
Connection for a TSS attitude sensor. The current version of 350 software does not support
this facility. DO NOT remove the blanking plug from this port.
Auxiliary input connection (for use when you use the 350 System in a Dualtrack installa-
tion). Refer to Appendix B for appropriate instructions.
CAUTION
Water could enter the SEP through any port that does not have a connector fitted. To
avoid damage from water ingress, you must fit the correct blanking plug supplied by
TSS to protect any unused port on the SEP.
Before you assemble any electrical couplings in the sub-sea installation, inspect the pins and
receptacles of all connectors for signs of damage, contamination or corrosion. Follow the
instructions in sub-section 4.1.2 to clean and care for the connectors.
Tighten the connector locking collars by hand only do not over tighten these connectors.
4.1.3.1 Power Requirement
The standard SEP requires an AC electrical supply in the range 110V to 120V (45 to 65Hz) to
operate. The maximum current drawn from the supply is 0.3A for a stand-alone 350 System,
or 3.1A if the System is part of a TSS Dualtrack installation.
Optionally, you may request an SEP that operates from an AC electrical supply in the range
220V to 240V (45 to 65Hz). This type of SEP draws a maximum supply current of 0.1A for a
stand-alone 350 System or 1.8A when the System is part of a TSS Dualtrack installation. Con-
tact TSS if you require a 350 System that operates from the nominal 240V electrical supply.
WARNING
Protection provided by the equipment might be impaired if you attempt to operate it
from an incorrect supply voltage. Operate the SEP only from an electrical supply of the
correct rating.
WARNING
The supply connector is a safety feature that allows the System to be isolated easily
from the electrical supply. Hand tighten the power connection only. Position the con-
nector to allow easy access for disconnection.
The SEP Power/Comms port accepts the AC electrical supply from the ROV and passes the
bi-directional communications between the SEP and the SDC. All electrical and communica-
tion connections to the SEP are through the Power and Communications cable, or ROV tail.
Table 41 lists the pins of the connector on the Power and Communications cable, together
with the relevant core colours. Refer to this table as you make the connection to the ROV elec-
trical distribution system. All cores in the cable are 1.34mm cross-section.
350 Cable Survey System
Page 4-6 of 18 TSS (UK) Limited Issue 2.1 DPN 402197
*Refer to sub-section 4.2.2 for details of the communication connections.
Lay the Power and Communications cable from the ROV electrical distribution system to the
SEP. Route the cable along fixed ROV frame members and use cable clips to secure it at regu-
lar intervals. Avoid applying any sharp bends or other points of mechanical stress along the
cable.
Follow the important advice listed in sub-section 4.1.2 concerning the care of connec-
tors.
Connect the Power and Communications cable to the 8-way male Power/Comms port on the
SEP. Tighten the knurled locking collar by hand only. Do not over tighten this connector.
CAUTION
It is very important to provide a good ground connection on pin number 2 of the cable.
A poor or a missing connection will severely degrade the performance of the 350 Sys-
tem.
You must make all connections to the ROV using waterproof connectors or splices of
good quality.
4.1.4 Sensing Coils
Each coil triad includes three identical but electrically independent sensing coils aligned mutu-
ally at right angles and supported in a purpose-designed mounting block. You must connect
these coils correctly to their respective channels on the SEP.
TSS supplies two cables that you must use to connect the coils to the SEP. Each cable has a
sealed junction block and three short tails terminated with 8-way right-angled connectors that
attach to the coils. Labels identify the three tails and help you to connect them to the appropri-
ate sensing coil. The cables are identical and interchangeable.
Table 41: Power and Communications cable
Connector Pin Number
(and Wire number)
Function Core colours
1 (N) Supply neutral line/L2 Blue
2 (E) ROV ground (refer to sub-section 4.1.1) Green/Yellow
3 (L) Supply 110V live/L1 Brown
Pin 4 (wire number 1) Comms 1 Orange
Pin 5 (wire number 2) Comms 2 White
Pin 6 (wire number 3) Comms 3 Red
Pin 7 (wire number 4) Comms 4 Yellow
Pin 8 (no connection) Spare Linked internally to the cable screen
(wire identity S) Link this wire to the cable screen Green
4 Electrical Installation
DPN 402197 Issue 2.1 TSS (UK) Limited Page 4-7 of 18
Each coil cable has a sealed junction block where the three short tails connect to the main
branch of the cable. This block has holes that you should use to attach the block to the coil
mounting bar on the ROV.
There are two 12-way ports on the SEP that accept the connectors of the coil cables. A label on
the SEP end cap identifies the port and starboard couplings for the coils.
You must connect the lateral, vertical and fore-aft sensing coils to their correct 8-way
connectors on the cable tails. Labels identify the cable tails to help you do this.
The 350 System cannot measure the position of the target if you connect the coils
incorrectly.
Signal levels detected by the sensing coils may be extremely low (less than 5V). You must
therefore take care to establish good cable connections when you install the System. Follow
the instructions and recommendations concerning the care of sub-sea connectors in sub-sec-
tion 4.1.2. Tighten all locking collars by hand do not over tighten these connectors.
Route the cables from the coils to the SEP by securing them along the ROV body using
cable clips. Avoid introducing any sharp bends or other points of stress, and ensure
that the cables are safe from potential damage from manipulators, thrusters or other
equipment on the ROV.
4.1.5 Sub-sea Altimeter
CAUTION
If you do not use the Altimeter port on the SEP, you must fit the correct blanking plug
supplied with the System to protect it from contact with sea water. The correct blanking
plug is TSS P/N 202208.
If you do not fit this blanking plug, rapid corrosion of the port will occur and the port
will fail. Sea water will enter the SEP through the corroded port to cause total failure of
the SEP.
CAUTION
The 6-way SEP ports for connecting the altimeter and the attitude sensor are identical.
To avoid possible damage and to ensure correct operation, connect the altimeter only
to the Altimeter port identified by a label on the SEP end cap. This version of the 350
System does not use the Sensor port and you must ensure there is a correct blanking
plug fitted to it during sub-sea operations.
350 Cable Survey System
Page 4-8 of 18 TSS (UK) Limited Issue 2.1 DPN 402197
Choose one of the two available methods that you may use to connect the altimeter:
1. Direct connection to the SEP. Refer to sub-section 4.1.5.1.
The SEP provides a DC power supply to drive the Datasonics altimeter if you connect it to
the Altimeter port on the SEP.
2. Connection through the umbilical to the SDC. Refer to sub-section 4.1.5.2.
Available for use with all types of altimeter compatible with the 350 System.
These altimeters use RS232 communications. To send their signals through the umbilical,
you must add them to the ROV multiplex unit and extract them at the surface. You must
also provide a separate power supply for the altimeter.
Generally, these types of altimeter have different data formats. Refer to sub-section 7.3.3 for
details of these formats.
4.1.5.1 Direct connection to the SEP
Route the cable from the Datasonics altimeter to the SEP. Secure the cable at regular intervals
along fixed frame members of the ROV. Avoid introducing any sharp bends or other points of
mechanical stress along the cable.
Follow the important advice listed in sub-section 4.1.2 concerning the care of connec-
tors.
Connect the cable to the 6-way Altimeter port of the SEP. Tighten the knurled locking collar
by hand only. Do not over tighten this connector.
Use the SDC display software to configure the 350 System for use with the Datasonics altime-
ter connected to the SEP. Refer to Section 6 for appropriate instructions.
4.1.5.2 Connection to the SDC
Make the following provisions if you intend to use one of the compatible alternative altimeters
with the 350 System:
Connect the altimeter to an available SDC serial port. Note that, because the altimeters use
RS232 communications, they cannot transmit their signals farther than approximately
15 metres. Therefore, you must add the altimeter signals to the ROV multiplexer and then
extract them at the surface. You must then convert the signals to RS232 for application to
the SDC.
Provide a separate power supply to drive the altimeter.
Refer to the manual supplied by the altimeter manufacturer for relevant connection details.
4 Electrical Installation
DPN 402197 Issue 2.1 TSS (UK) Limited Page 4-9 of 18
Connect the RS232 altimeter signals to the SDC through the 9-way D-type female serial port.
The pin designations for this port are as follows:
4.1.6 Roll/Pitch Sensor
CAUTION
Water could enter the SEP through any port that does not have a connector fitted.
The current version of the 350 System cannot use information from an attitude sensor.
Therefore, you must fit the correct blanking plug supplied by TSS to the Sensor port
on the SEP. The correct blanking plug is TSS P/N 202208.
If you do not fit this blanking plug, rapid corrosion of the port will occur and the port
will fail. Sea water will enter the SEP through the corroded port to cause total failure of
the SEP.
The Roll/Pitch Sensor option is not yet available for use with the 350 System. Do not make
any connection to the SEP Sensor port. Leave the blanking plug fitted to this port.
Table 42: RS232 connection to COM2
Altimeter signal SDC COM2 pin connection
RS232 data from altimeter Pin 2 (receive)
RS232 data to altimeter Pin 3 (transmit). Necessary for use only with the OSEL Bathymetric System, where com-
munications must be bi-directional.
RS232 common Pin 5 (ground)
350 Cable Survey System
Page 4-10 of 18 TSS (UK) Limited Issue 2.1 DPN 402197
4.2 SURFACE DISPLAY COMPUTER
Refer to sub-section 2.3 for a description of the SDC and Section 9 for a minimum specifica-
tion.
The following sub-sections 4.2.2 to 4.2.4 explain the various connections that you may make
to the SDC.
CAUTION
You must route all cables to the SDC through the rear of the transit case. You must
open and remove the rear panel of the case to allow this.
Figure 42: SDC Rear panel with key to ports
4.2.1 Power Connection
Connect AC electrical power to the SDC through the 3-core electrical supply cable and stand-
ard 3-pin IEC electrical inlet.
The SDC has an auto ranging power supply unit that configures itself automatically to use an
electrical supply in its acceptable range 85 to 265V AC (47 to 63Hz).
4.2.2 Communication Link SEP to SDC
Use the SDC port COMMS FROM POD
The standard communication link between the SDC and the sub-sea installation of the 350
System uses a 2-wire 20mA digital current-loop carried on a twisted pair within the ROV
umbilical. To avoid possible communication contentions, the SDC acts as the Master and the
SEP acts as the Slave in this link.
If the umbilical cable is of good quality, experience has shown that you may use this commu-
nication method successfully through transmission distances up to 1000 metres. To ensure
COLOUR CV MONO CV
OUT IN OUT IN
IN OUT
S-VIDEO
COMMS FROM POD RS232 TO COM1
PRINTER COM1
GPS LOG O/P ALTIMETER
ANALOGUE O/P
SDC 8
VGA
1 2 3
4 5
6 7
8 9 10
11
Colour CV IN and OUT
Mono CV IN and OUT
S-Video IN and OUT
Comms from SEP
RS-232 to COM1
Printer
COM1
Altimeter
External log o/p
Not used (GPS)
Analogue o/p
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
9:
10:
11:
4 Electrical Installation
DPN 402197 Issue 2.1 TSS (UK) Limited Page 4-11 of 18
reliable communications through the umbilical, select a twisted pair that has the following
characteristics:
There are two further methods that you may use to establish successful communication
between the SDC and the sub-sea components of the 350 System:
4-wire 20mA digital current-loop
You should select this method when the umbilical link to the ROV is longer than 1000
metres, or where you cannot establish reliable communication using a 2-wire current-loop.
You will need to reconfigure the SDC and the SEP to use this communication method.
Refer to sub-section 4.2.2.1 for instructions to do this.
After you have made the necessary changes in the SEP and the SDC, perform a simple
communication check.
RS232
This is a 3-wire link suitable only for communication over distances up to 15 metres. You
may use this method to transmit data to the survey control room using the ROV multi-
plexer and an existing data link to the survey control room.
You will need to reconfigure the SDC and the SEP to use this communication method.
Refer to sub-section 4.2.2.1 for instructions to do this.
The Systems default parameters for communication between the SDC and the SEP are 9600
baud with 8 data bits, 2 stop bits and no parity.
These communication settings are valid even when you use 2-wire or 4-wire current-
loop communications. This is because the SDC converts between current-loop and
RS232 communications through a special converter card. All communication between
the SDC and the sub-sea installation passes through the relevant SDC serial port.
Communication lines between the SDC and the sub-sea components are opto-isolated at both
ends.
The following tables show the connections that you must make between the SEP and the SDC
for each of the three communication methods. Refer to sub-section 4.1.3 and Table 44 on
Table 43: Ideal twisted pair characteristics for successful communication
Twisted pair characteristic Ideal value
Overall resistance Less than 200
Core size
0.5 to 1.0mm
2
Inter-conductor capacitance Less than 100pF per metre
350 Cable Survey System
Page 4-12 of 18 TSS (UK) Limited Issue 2.1 DPN 402197
page 12 for details of the connections that you must make between the SEP and the ROV elec-
trical distribution system.
To use current-loop communications you must reserve either one or two conductor pairs in the
ROV umbilical for the exclusive use of the 350 System. The System includes a cable that you
should use to connect the COMMS FROM POD port on the SDC to the twisted pairs in the
ROV umbilical. The cable has a 15-way D-type connector for connection to the SDC
COMMS FROM POD port, and open tails for connection to the umbilical at a junction box.
See Tables 44 to 46 for the connection details of the 15-way D-type connector fitted to this
cable.
When you connect the communication cable to the SDC, ensure that the supplied jumper cable
is fitted between the RS232 TO COM1 and the COM1 port on the SDC.
If you use RS232 communications through an existing multiplexed link, you may connect
directly from your de-multiplexer to the SDC COM1 at the 9-way D-type connector.
Table 44: Power and Communications cable 2-wire current loop connections
SEP Power/Comms port
Pin number
Function
SDC COMMS FROM POD
(15 way) pin connection
4
5
CL-
CL+

ROV umbilical
3
4
Table 45: Power and Communications cable 4-wire current-loop connections
SEP Power/Comms port
Pin number
Function
SDC COMMS FROM POD
(15-way) Pin connection
4
5
CL+ Input
CL- Input

ROV umbilical (Tx in SDC)

3
4
6
7
CL+ Output
CL- Output
(Tx in SEP) 5
6
Table 46: Power and Communications cable RS232 connections
SEP Power/Comms port
Pin number
Function
SDC COMMS FROM POD
(15-way) Pin connection*
4
5
Tx output from SEP
Rx input to SEP

Data cable
3
4
6 Common 5
* You may connect RS232 communications directly to the 9-way D-type serial communication port
COM1 on the SDC.
4 Electrical Installation
DPN 402197 Issue 2.1 TSS (UK) Limited Page 4-13 of 18
4.2.2.1 Alternative Communication Methods
WARNING
There is a risk of death or serious injury by electric shock when you work inside the
SDC, the SEP or the PSU.
Only a competent engineer who has the relevant training and experience should open
any part of the 350 System.
Power-off and isolate the equipment from the mains supply voltage before you open
any part of the 350 System. Observe all relevant local and national safety regulations
while you perform any maintenance work on the 350 System.
Re-fit all safety covers and ground connections to the 350 System before you re-con-
nect the equipment to the mains electrical supply.
Many components within the SDC are susceptible to damage due to electrostatic dis-
charge. You must take precautions against such damage: These precautions include
the use of a grounded conductive mat and wrist-strap. TSS (UK) Limited will not accept
responsibility for any damage caused by failure to take such precautionary measures.
The standard communication link between the SDC and the sub-sea installations of the 350
System uses a 2-wire 20mA digital current-loop carried on a twisted pair within the ROV
umbilical. To configure the 350 System so that it uses an alternative communication method,
you must change link settings inside the SEP and the SDC.
The alternative communication methods are:
4-wire 20mA digital current-loop
Suitable for use with umbilical cables longer than 1000 metres, or where the quality of the
umbilical cable prevents effective use of the standard 2-wire method.
In practice, the 4-wire method should be suitable for use with umbilical cables up to 4000
metres long if the umbilical is of good quality.
RS232
Suitable for communication up to distances of 15 metres. This method is practical where a
multiplexed communication link already exists between the ROV and the surface vessel, for
example where you use a fibre-optic umbilical cable.
Configure the SEP
CAUTION
Many components inside the SEP are susceptible to damage due to electrostatic dis-
charge. You must take precautions to prevent such damage whenever you open the
SEP. These precautions include the use of a grounded conductive mat and wrist-strap.
TSS will not accept responsibility for any damage caused by failure to take such meas-
ures.
350 Cable Survey System
Page 4-14 of 18 TSS (UK) Limited Issue 2.1 DPN 402197
If you need to select a different communication method, change the settings of links
inside the SEP before you install it on board the ROV.
Follow the instructions in sub-section 9.2.2 to open the SEP and gain access to the circuit
cards.
Identify the Processor Board and locate the five links LK1 to LK5 as shown in Figure 44.
Figure 43: Link detail shown using the same orientation as in Figure 44
Figure 44: Link location on the SEP processor board
The links LK1 to LK5 are identical. Each set of links has a jumper that connects pairs of pins
A to D as appropriate. Remove each of these jumpers from LK1 to LK5 in turn and fit them
on the link pins appropriate for the selected communication method:
Table 47: Link settings for LK1 to LK5
Communication method Pin pairs (see Figure 43)
RS232 A
RS422 B
4-wire 20mA digital current-loop C
2-wire 20mA digital current-loop (standard) D
4 Electrical Installation
DPN 402197 Issue 2.1 TSS (UK) Limited Page 4-15 of 18
All five links have the same identification sequence and must be set identically. DO
NOT FORGET to set the jumper on link LK1, which is located away from links LK2 to
LK5 on the board.
Once you have set all the links, follow the instructions in sub-section 9.2.2 to re-assemble the
SEP.
It is a good idea to keep the links on the spare Processor Board set identically to those
in the SEP. This avoids potential communication problems if you need to replace the
Processor Board from the field support kit during a survey.
Configure the SDC
WARNING
There is a risk of death or serious injury by electric shock when you work inside the
SDC or the SEP.
Only a competent engineer who has the relevant training and experience should open
the SDC or the SEP.
Power-off and isolate the equipment from the mains electrical supply before you open
the SDC or the SEP. Observe all relevant local and national safety regulations while you
perform any maintenance work on the 350 System.
Re-fit all safety covers and ground connections to the 350 System before you re-con-
nect the equipment to the mains electrical supply.
You do not need to change the link setting on the Converter Card if you use RS232
communications connected directly to a 9-way D-type serial port of the SDC.
To change the communication method you will need to set a link on the Converter Card of the
SDC. Follow the instructions below carefully:
1. Power-off the SDC and disconnect it from the AC electrical supply.
2. Follow the instructions in sub-section 9.2.1 to open the SDC.
3. Identify the Converter Card by the fact that it holds the 15-way and 9-way D-type ports
labelled Pod to C/Loop.
4. Disconnect the 15-way and the 9-way D-type connectors from the Converter Card.
5. Inside the SDC, remove the single screw that secures the retaining bar of the Converter
Card. Pull the card carefully to release it from the edge connector.
Figure 45 shows the location of the link LK1 on the SDC Converter Card.
350 Cable Survey System
Page 4-16 of 18 TSS (UK) Limited Issue 2.1 DPN 402197
Figure 45: Location of link LK1 on the SDC Converter Card
Link LK1 in the SDC is a plug-in header that locates into a 16-pin DIL socket. The header
configures the Converter Card to the appropriate communication method.
You may insert any of three substitute headers to select the communication method. Table 48
lists the part numbers for the three header types:
1. Make certain that you have the correct link header for your chosen communication
method. Carefully remove the existing link header from the socket and store it safely in the
field support kit. The pins of the header are thin and you might damage them if you
handle the link carelessly.
2. Align the pins of the new link header with the receptacles in the socket. Pin 1 of the link
header is identified by a white spot and must be orientated as shown in Figure 45. Press
the link header carefully into position until it seats properly in the socket. Check that none
of the pins has become bent or damaged and that all are inserted fully into the socket.
3. Taking care to engage the edge connector properly, refit the Converter Card in the SDC.
Use the original screw to secure the retaining bar in position. Reconnect the 15-way and
the 9-way D-type connectors.
4. Follow the instructions in sub-section 9.2.1 to reassemble the SDC.
After you have changed the communication method, perform a communications check
between the SDC and the sub-sea installation.
You must perform a communication check as part of the pre-dive tests. Refer to sub-
section 7.2.1 for details of the recommended pre-dive test procedure.
Table 48: Part numbers for SDC Converter Card links
2-wire current-loop (standard fit) 4-wire current-loop RS232
465003 465009 465006
4 Electrical Installation
DPN 402197 Issue 2.1 TSS (UK) Limited Page 4-17 of 18
4.2.3 Interface to Data Logger
During normal survey operations, the 350 System acquires data at a rate of approximately
1MB per hour. You should arrange to record the official survey log on a suitable data logger.
For your convenience and for test purposes, the 350 System can also create a logged record
internally on the SDC hard disk. Data stored using the internal logging facility does not pos-
sess the same format as that transmitted to the external data logger, and you should not use it
as the primary survey log. Internal logging allows you to record the survey and then to replay
the file subsequently using DeepView on the SDC. You cannot replay external log files
through the SDC in this way.
The internal logging facility on the 350 System is for your convenience and for test pur-
poses only. Do not use it as the principal survey logging tool.
Unless otherwise stated, this Manual describes the external logging facility of the 350
System.
Refer to sub-section 7.3.2 for a description of the format that the 350 System uses to log data.
Make a connection between the 350 System and an external data logger using an available
9-way D-type serial communication port on the SDC. The pin designations of this port are as
follows:
4.2.4 Interface to Video
Use the SDC ports COLOUR CV IN and COLOUR CV OUT, or MONO CV IN and
MONO CV OUT, or S-VIDEO IN and S-VIDEO OUT
1. Video input Use appropriate input port for your format (COLOUR CV IN, MONO CV
IN, or S-VIDEO IN) These are clearly marked on the reverse panel of the SDC.
The standard SDC accepts video input in PAL or NTSC format from a camera mounted on
the ROV. Apply the video signal to the SDC through the appropriate video input port. TSS
supplies CV cables (dual phono to phono) and a pair of BNC to phono adapters to assist
video connection with the 350 System.
Note that you cannot display the video channel on the SDC screen.
The SDC mixes video images from the sub-sea camera with graphical information gener-
ated by the SEP. You may view the composite image through the appropriate video output
port.
2. Video output Use appropriate output port for your format (COLOUR CV OUT, MONO
CV OUT, or S-VIDEO OUT)
The format of the SDC video output signal will match that of the input video signal. That
Table 49: RS232 connection for a data logger
Signal to Data Logger COM-3 on the SDC
RS232 input to data logger Pin 3 (transmit)
RS232 common Pin 5 (ground)
350 Cable Survey System
Page 4-18 of 18 TSS (UK) Limited Issue 2.1 DPN 402197
is if your input is PAL, then the output will be PAL. Similarly if your input is NTSC then
the output will be NTSC. Further the video output will reflect the specific connections
used i.e if the video input is monochrome CV, the output will be monochrome CV and will
be provided via the MONO CV O/P port (similarly colour CV input will provide via the
COLOUR CV O/P, and S-Video output will be provided via the S-VIDEO O/P).
Note A monochrome CV input may be applied to the COLOUR CV IN to allow the col-
ours of the overlay graphics to be viewed, however colour aberrations in the video out-
put may be visible.
You may connect this signal to a standard video monitor using 75 screened cable. The
output can drive a single monitor or multiple monitors if you add a suitable video drive
amplifier.
5 System Configuration
DPN 402197 Issue 2.1 VT TSS Limited Page 5-1 of 8
5 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
Before you power-on the SDC and the sub-sea components of the 350 System, make
certain that:
You have installed the surface and sub-sea components correctly as instructed in Sec-
tion 3.
You have made all electrical connections within the System using the correct cables as
instructed in Section 4.
You have established an appropriate communication method between the surface and
the sub-sea components.
The SDC has all the software that you will need to operate the 350 System already installed.
This section of the Manual describes the features of this DeepView for Windows display
software that you must use to configure the 350 System.
Although you may access the majority of commands by using an appropriate sequence of key
presses on the SDC key pads, you will find it easier to use the software if you use a suitable
pointing device such as a mouse or the trackpad supplied with the System.
In these instructions, key press sequences appear in square brackets. For example, press
[SHIFT]+[F4] means to press the Shift key and the function key F4 together.
These instructions assume you are reasonably familiar with the Microsoft Windows 2000
operating environment and that you know how to select commands and options by clicking
with the buttons on the pointing device.
This section of the Manual explains how to start the SDC and use the DeepView System Con-
figuration Wizard to establish the correct operating configuration for the 350 System.
5.1 Software Installation Page 2
How to install DeepView for Windows on an additional PC.
5.2 Power on Procedure Page 3
How to start operation of the sub-sea and surface installations of the 350 System.
5.3 DeepView For Windows - System Configuration Page 5
How to use DeepView for Windows to configure the 350 System for a survey operation.
5.4 Print Configuration Page 8
It is important to print details of the 350 System configuration at the start and end of a survey.
440 Pipe and Cable Survey System
Page 5-2 of 8 VT TSS Limited Issue 2.1 DPN 402197
5.1 SOFTWARE INSTALLATION
The SDC supplied with the 350 System already has the DeepView for Windows software
installed on its hard disk together with the Microsoft Windows 2000 operating system needed
to run it.
TSS supplies a CD containing the DeepView for Windows software with the 350 System. You
may install this software, under licence, on a separate PC to support the main installation on
the SDC or to replay an internally logged data file. The following instructions explain how to
install the software on a separate PC.
If you do not need to install the software on a PC or on the SDC, go directly to sub-sec-
tion 5.2 for instructions to begin using the 350 System and DeepView for Windows.
To install the software it is recommended that you read the readme.txt file on the CD provided
which will be updated with any enhancements or issues to be aware of prior to installing the
software:
1. Insert the supplied CD into the CD-ROM drive of your PC.
2. The software should start automatically. If it does not, within the Windows environment
select My Computer and the respective drive for your CD-ROM drive. Within the con-
tents of the CD-ROM you will find a README file and a setup program which will auto-
matically install the software.
3. To use DeepView for Windows, double click on the TSS icon that the Install Shield places
on your Windows 2000 desktop.
Take the following precautionary measures to maintain the SDC and your PC in optimal
condition:
Check all the drives on your PC for viruses using current versions of an approved anti-
virus program.
Perform a Windows Scandisk and a Defrag session regularly.
Follow the correct procedures to close down Windows and power-off the SDC and your
PC.
NEVER install unauthorised software on the SDC.
NEVER make any alterations to the Windows registry unless you are entirely certain that
you know what you are doing, and have backed up the registry files system.dat and
user.dat. Inappropriate modifications to the Windows registry can prevent the SDC
from operating.
5 System Configuration
DPN 402197 Issue 2.1 VT TSS Limited Page 5-3 of 8
5.2 POWER-ON PROCEDURE
During its initialisation, DeepView for Windows searches for a valid initialisation file on
the SDC hard disk. If the file exists and the SDC receives compatible data packets from
the SEP, DeepView for Windows will begin to operate using the configuration details
stored in the initialisation file. If DeepView for Windows does not find the initialisation
file or if there are no compatible data packets arriving from the SEP, it will start the Sys-
tem Configuration Wizard to help you establish reliable communications.
For this reason it is usually better to power-on the sub-sea installation before you
power-on the SDC.
Power-on the sub-sea components of the 350 System:
All electrical power for the sub-sea components arrives through a single cable into the PSU,
which generates the following stabilised and conditioned DC supplies:
All supplies necessary to operate the SEP
Power for a suitable sub-sea altimeter connected directly to the SEP. If you connect your
altimeter to the SDC instead then you must provide a separate power supply for it.
Drive current for the 20mA digital current-loop
Refer to sub-section 4.1 for instructions to make the electrical connections to and between the
sub-sea components of the 350 System. The System starts to operate when you provide the
correct electrical supply to the PSU.
Power-on the sub-sea components of the 350 System. At the SDC, release the lock and open
the hinged access panel on the SDC front panel to reveal the rocker type power switch, the
CD-ROM drive and the 3-inch floppy disk drive.
Check that the C/LOOP LED shows red to indicate the presence of the 20mA drive current
in the communication current-loop. Because the SEP generates this drive current, the LED
should show red even before you power-on the SDC. By showing red, the LED provides two
important visual checks on the System:
It confirms that the SEP is receiving electrical power from the ROV.
Because the LED is in series with the current-loop, it proves the loop is intact. Note that
the LED shows only that the current-loop is intact it does NOT indicate that there are
successful communications passing between the SDC and the SEP.
The C/LOOP LED will show red only if you use either of the two available current-loop
communication methods it will not illuminate if you use the RS232 communication
method.
440 Pipe and Cable Survey System
Page 5-4 of 8 VT TSS Limited Issue 2.1 DPN 402197
Power-on the SDC:
Check that you have connected an AC electrical supply of the correct rating to the three-pin
IEC mains inlet on the SDC (refer to sub-section 4.2 for instructions to connect power to the
SDC).
Remove any disks that might be loaded into the drives. Operate the power switch to power-on
the SDC.
After you power-on the SDC, the POWER LED should show green and the HDD LED
should flicker amber as the SDC begins an initialisation sequence that lasts approximately a
minute. The SDC will launch Microsoft Windows and the DeepView for Windows display
software automatically after it has completed the initialisation sequence.
Provided the software launches successfully, you will see the DeepView for Windows opening
splash screen. DeepView for Windows will then search for an initialisation file on the SDC
that includes details of the previous operating configuration. If the software finds the initialisa-
tion file and the SDC receives data packets from the SEP that are compatible with that file,
then it will begin to operate using the same configuration. Otherwise, DeepView for Windows
will launch the System Configuration Wizard that allows you to define the operating parame-
ters used by the System.
Close and secure the hinged access panel.
To start the display software from Windows, select StartPROGRAMSDeepView for
WindowsDeepView for Windows.
The SDC has tactile membrane keypads for alphanumeric, function-key. You may use a mouse
or the supplied trackpad to select commands and options from within DeepView for Windows,
and you may use the keypads to enter commands.
Under some circumstances, DeepView for Windows may not be able to communicate with the
SEP even though the C/LOOP LED is showing red. This might occur, for example, if the
characteristics of the umbilical cable are unsuitable for use with 2-wire current-loop commu-
nications. You may then have to reconfigure the 350 System to use a different communication
method see sub-section 4.2.2. See also the fault identification sequences described in sub-
section 9.3.
5 System Configuration
DPN 402197 Issue 2.1 VT TSS Limited Page 5-5 of 8
5.3 DEEPVIEW FOR WINDOWS - SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
Before you can use the 350 System for the first time you must configure the software. This
procedure can be enabled to run every time you open DeepView for Windows or if your setup
is consistent it can be disabled and accessed via System Configuration Wizard from the con-
figuration menu when DeepView is operational. The options that you are able to configure are
the following:
Figure 51: DeepView for Windows - System Configuration Wizard
5.3.1 SEP type
Define whether there is no SEP, a stand alone 440, 350, or whether it is part of a Dualtrack
System. This setting determines the data format that DeepView for Windows expects to
receive from the sub-sea installation and sets the style of Run Window that the software will
use to display the System measurements.
There are four options for setting the SEP type:
No SEP
Use this option to operate DeepView for Windows with no SEP connected. This might be
necessary, for example, if you wish to use DeepView for Windows to replay data on a sep-
arate PC.
440
Use this option to control a stand-alone 440 System.
350
Use this option to control a stand-alone 350 System.
Dualtrack
Use this option to control a Dualtrack System comprising an interconnected 440 and 350
System controlled from the same SDC. You should use this option even if you intend to
use only one of the Systems during the survey.
440 Pipe and Cable Survey System
Page 5-6 of 8 VT TSS Limited Issue 2.1 DPN 402197
5.3.2 Communication ports
Define the serial communication ports and their communication parameters. The SDC uses the
serial communication ports to communicate with the SEP and with external devices such as
the sub-sea altimeter and a data logger.
During System Configuration the only port that you have to specify is the Communica-
tion to the Sub Sea Electronic Pod (or SEP). Below is outlined a list of the COM Ports
and their default assignments.
The SDC has five serial communication ports that it uses to communicate with external and
peripheral equipment. The standard assignations for these ports are as follows. You may
change these if necessary.
COM1 is used to pass serial communications between the SEP and the SDC. DeepView
uses a serial port for this purpose even if you set the 350 System to use current-loop com-
munications. The SDC includes the hardware necessary to convert between these stand-
ards.
Note that the current-loop communications connects through a jumper link from the
current-loop converter card. If you decide to use an alternative serial communications
port for the primary communications circuit, then you must also move the link connec-
tion to the alternative serial port.
COM2 (labelled ALTIMETER on the rear connector panel of the SDC) is used to accept
serial data from any compatible altimeter that is not connected directly to the SEP. The
maximum range for RS232 communications is 15 metres. Therefore, to connect an altime-
ter to the SDC you must add its signals to an existing multiplexed data link in the ROV
umbilical and then extract them at the surface. Refer to sub-section 6.2.2.1 for instructions
to configure an altimeter and set its communication parameters.
COM3 (labelled LOG O/P on the rear connector panel of the SDC) is used to connect the
SDC to a separate user-supplied data logger. You should use a data logger to record the
survey measurements acquired by the 350 System. Refer to sub-section 6.2.2.2 for instruc-
tions to configure DeepView for data logging and to set appropriate communication
parameters.
COM4 (labelled GPS on the rear connector panel of the SDC) is not used.
COM5 (is not available on the rear connector panel of the SDC) is used by the SDC to
communicate with the video overlay card.
DeepView for Windows allows you to set the communication parameters for each of the serial
ports. Choose settings that are appropriate for the connected equipment refer to the technical
manuals of the attached equipment if necessary. Note that the standard communication param-
eters for COM1, the communication link between the SDC and the SEP are set to operate at
9600 baud using 8 data bits, two stop bits and no parity.
5 System Configuration
DPN 402197 Issue 2.1 VT TSS Limited Page 5-7 of 8
The update rate for your System will reduce if you set a lower baud rate for this com-
munication link. You should consider reducing the baud rate for this link only if you
experience persistent communication problems caused by an umbilical cable of poor
quality. Ideally, in these circumstances you should swap to using an umbilical cable of
good quality instead.
At this point the software will provide an analysis of the data status and will provide you with
a summary screen of the findings that it has established.
DeepView will now be configured to operate with the 350 System.
Before clicking on Finish you have tick options to select:-
Show the pre-dive checklist when the System Configuration Window is closed.
Whether the System Configuration Wizard runs when DeepView for Windows starts.
If the box is checked, the System Configuration Wizard will be run when DeepView for
Windows starts. If the box is not checked and if a configuration file is available, the config-
uration file will be used to configure DeepView for Windows.
DeepView stores the configuration details automatically in an initialisation file when Deep-
View is closing down. This allows the System to establish the same configuration when you
next power-on the SDC provided it recognises the data format arriving from the SEP as
being compatible with the stored configuration details. This means that you should power-on
the SEP before you power-on the SDC.
440 Pipe and Cable Survey System
Page 5-8 of 8 VT TSS Limited Issue 2.1 DPN 402197
5.4 PRINT CONFIGURATION
It is important to print details of the 350 System configuration at the start and end of a survey.
This information is also duplicated in section 6.2.1.1, which outlines the operating of Deep-
View for Windows.
Select FilePrint Configuration to send a copy of the System Configuration to the Windows
Notepad application. You may edit the details and print them from this application. An exam-
ple of the print configuration via Windows notepad.
The ability to print the configuration is an important feature of DeepView. It allows you to create a
permanent written record of the configuration to supplement the survey logs.
Full analysis and post-processing of the raw data can be effective only if you retain a record of
the 350 System configuration at the time of the survey. Appendix C includes a suitable form for
you to record these details.
6 Operation software
DPN 402197 Issue 2.1 VT TSS Limited Page 6-1 of 32
6 OPERATION SOFTWARE
The SDC has all the software that you will need to operate the 350 System already installed
and configured to start automatically when you power-on the SDC. This section of the Manual
describes the features of this display software that you must use to operate the 350 System.
Before you attempt to use the 350 System during a survey, make certain you have fol-
lowed all the instructions in this Manual to install, connect and configure the System
properly. You cannot acquire valid survey data unless you have carried out these oper-
ations correctly.
This section of the Manual explains how to use the 350 System to conduct a survey. The
instructions consist of a sequence of suggested procedures that begins with the pre-dive checks
that you should complete and finishes with some suggested procedures to close down the 350
System safely and efficiently.
Refer to sub-section 5.2 for instructions to power-on the 350 System.
6.1 Configuration Page 2
An overview of configuring DeepView for Windows and parameters that are used during a
survey.
6.2 DeepView for Windows Operating Controls Page 2
A detailed explanation of the menu functions, toolbar controls and display features of the
DeepView for Windows Run Window.
6.3 After the Dive Page 28
How to close DeepView for Windows and power-off the 350 System correctly after comple-
tion of the survey. This is important if you do not follow the correct procedure to close Deep-
View and Windows you might corrupt some of the data files on the SDC hard disk.
6.4 Replaying log files Page 29
An explanation of how to replay an internal log file through the SDC, and an explanation of
the additional toolbar facility.
350 Cable Survey System
Page 6-2 of 32 VT TSS Limited Issue 2.1 DPN 402197
6.1 CONFIGURATION
TSS has designed the 350 System and Deepview for Windows to be easy to use. A System
Configuration Wizard guides you quickly through the procedure to choose the SEP type and
communication parameters. However, some important parameters must be entered before the
survey can begin.
6.1.1 Survey Parameters
To follow we have listed some key parameters that will be required to be set prior to and dur-
ing the survey. Details of setting these parameters are covered in the software details in section
6.2.
Configure the 350SEP with the following information:
6.1.1.1 Tone Frequency
Set this value to the same frequency as that present on the cable. The range is from zero to
200Hz. This value must be set accurately, or the system will not find the tone.
6.1.1.2 Threshold
Set an appropriate value for threshold.
High settings will make the 350 System less sensitive to noise but will also decrease its operat-
ing range. The default setting of 100V has proved to be suitable for the majority of survey
operations.
If you are in any doubt about threshold, leave the setting at its default value.
6.1.1.3 Coil Separation
Section 3.2.2 explains how to install the two coil triads on the ROV and adjust the separation
distance. Enter the separation distance in cm. The accuracy of the survey depends on this
parameter being entered correctly.
6.2 DEEPVIEW FOR WINDOWS OPERATING CONTROLS
TSS has designed DeepView for Windows to provide full functionality when you use a point-
ing device, such as a mouse or the supplied trackball, to select commands and controls. You
may also access many software features by using the SDC keypads.
The instructions that follow assume you to be reasonably familiar with the Microsoft
Windows operating environment. If necessary, refer to a relevant Windows user guide,
such as the one that accompanies the SDC, for instructions to use Windows.
6.2.1 How to Use DeepView for Windows
This sub-section explains how to use the software commands and tools during a survey. The
instructions refer to the Run Window and to the various secondary windows described
throughout this section. DeepView includes an on-line Help structure that summarises the
advice and instructions included here. There is also a simple Help panel, accessible by press-
ing function key [F1] from the Run Window, to list the function key short cuts that select some
of the commands and tools described below. Sub-section 6.2.4 lists the function keys available
for use in the 440 mode.
6 Operation software
DPN 402197 Issue 2.1 VT TSS Limited Page 6-3 of 32
Follow the advice throughout Section 7 for a survey procedure using the 350 System.
Menu commands
Table 61 lists the commands available on the DeepView Menu Bar, together with their
hotkey access codes and function keys if applicable.
Table 61: DeepView Menu Commands
Menu item
Sub-menu,
[hot key access]
and Function key
Description
File Open /Close Replay
File [F2]
Specify the name and location of an existing internally logged file that you
wish to replay through DeepView for Windows. The Replay Window includes
the same features and as the Run Window and operates in a similar way. A
button on the DeepView for Windows toolbar performs the same function as
this command. You cannot use DeepView for Windows to replay externally
logged files.
New Log File
[F3]
Specify the name and location of a new file to accept the internal logging
record. File names can have up to 255 characters. They can include spaces
but must exclude the characters \ / : * ? < > and |. A button on the Deep-
View for Windows toolbar also performs the same function as this command.
Refer to sub-section 6.4. for a description of data logging.
Close Log File
[Ctrl + F3]
If you have an internal logging file open, use this command to close it. Once
you have closed the file, you cannot open it again to add more data.
Backup Configuration This will prompt you with a dialog box to provide a name to save the current
parameters set to a file that can be accessed at a later date.
Restore Configuration This will provide you with a list of any previously saved configuration files
that you can load.
Print Configuration Use this command to send a copy of the 350 System configuration to win-
dows Notepad. You should print the configuration details from that applica-
tion at the start of the survey and again at the end of the survey. Retain the
hard copy prints with the survey records.
Exit Use this command to exit the DeepView program and return to the Windows
operating environment.
It is recommended that you save a configuration file for each survey. You can then restore this
configuration file to give the settings for the next job.
350 Cable Survey System
Page 6-4 of 32 VT TSS Limited Issue 2.1 DPN 402197
View Run Window
[Ctrl + R]
Select this command to open or close the DeepView Run Window. You may
resize and move the Run Window on the SDC screen after you open it. The
normal condition is for the Run Window to be closed when you start Deep-
View. A button on the DeepView for Windows toolbar performs the same
function as this command.
Forward Search Win-
dow [Ctrl + F]
This function is described in section 6.2.1.3.
Toggle Height Scale
[Ctrl + H]
Use this command to modify the available selection of displayable vertical
ranges. The vertical ranges vary between the 350 and the 440 systems and
are as follows:
350 mode: 0m to 2m, 5m, 15m or 30m
440 mode: 0m to 2m and 0m to 5m.
Toggle Swath Width
[Ctrl + W]
Use this command to alter the swath range for the 350. The available ranges
are 0m +/-2m, 0m to +/-5m and 0m to +/-15m.
Scope and Spectrum
Analyser Window
Use this command to open or close the Scope and Spectrum Analyser Win-
dow. A button on the DeepView for Windows toolbar performs the same
function as this command. The normal condition is for the Scope and Spec-
trum Analyser Window to be closed when you start DeepView for Windows.
Note that the data string transmitted from the SEP to the SDC extends
significantly in length when you open the Scope and Spectrum Ana-
lyser Window. This will reduce the data update rate. You should there-
fore keep this window closed unless you require it.
System Errors Window Use this command to open or close the System Errors Window described in
sub-section 6.2.1.4. A button on the DeepView for Windows toolbar performs
the same function as this command. The normal condition is for the System
Errors Window to be closed when you start DeepView for Windows.
Terminal Window
[TAB]
Use this command to open or close the Terminal Window described in sub-
section 6.2.1.4. A button on the DeepView for Windows toolbar performs the
same function as this command. The normal condition is for the Terminal
Window to be closed when you start DeepView for Windows.
Video Overlay Enable
[Ctrl + V]
Use this command to select the Video Overlay function. A button on the
DeepView for Windows toolbar performs the same function as this com-
mand. The video overlay feature allows the SDC to accept input from a video
camera and to output the video image overlaid with the target co-ordinates
and steering information.
Table 61: DeepView Menu Commands (Continued)
Menu item
Sub-menu,
[hot key access]
and Function key
Description
6 Operation software
DPN 402197 Issue 2.1 VT TSS Limited Page 6-5 of 32
Configuration System parameters
[Shift + F2]
This command displays a dialog panel that allows you to establish the type
of SEP and the serial communications parameters. Refer to the following
sections for relevant details and instructions.
Altimeter
[Shift + F3]
This command displays a dialog panel that allows you to establish the physi-
cal and serial communications parameters of an altimeter used with the 350
System. Refer to sub-section 6.2.2.1 for relevant details and instructions.
The System Configuration Wizard also displays a similar dialog panel.
External Output
[Shift + F5]
This command displays a dialog panel that allows you to configure the SDC
output to an external data logger. Set the type of data packet and its update
rate, and the serial port communication parameters.
Note that you must establish appropriate parameters for the external output
if you wish to use the video overlay option, even if you do not intend to use
the external data logging features.
Analogue Output
[Shift +F6]]
Use this command to configure the optional analogue output feature. Refer
to appendix B.1 for a description of the analogue output option.
Run Background
Compensation
[Shift + F7]
This command is not applicable to the 350.
Seawater Compensa-
tion [Shift + F8]
This command is not applicable to the 350.
Load factory Defaults
[Shift + F9]
This will prompt you with a caution box to confirm that you would like to reset
the software back to the original factory defaults. This will eliminate any user
parameters that have been previously configured.
Video Overlay Setup
[Shift + F10]
Refer to sub-section 6.2.2.5 for a description of the video overlay feature.
System Configuration
Wizard [Ctrl + F10]
This selection will return you to the set-up options screen that you have
viewed when opening up the software. Use of this option will result in all of
the parameters being reset to default.
Window Cascade
[ALT][W][C]
Use this command to arrange the various operating windows so that they
overlap but with their title bars visible. This does not affect the Diagnostics
Window or the Target Tracking Window.
Tile Horizontally
[ALT][W][H]
Use this command to arrange the various operating windows so that they are
next to each other horizontally. This arrangement allows you to see the
entire area of each window, although DeepView might resize the windows to
fit the available area. This does not affect the Diagnostics Window or the Tar-
get Tracking Window.
Tile Vertically
[ALT][W][V]
Use this command to arrange the various operating windows so that they are
next to each other vertically. This arrangement allows you to see the entire
area of each window, although DeepView might resize the windows to fit the
available area. This does not affect the Diagnostics Window or the Target
Tracking Window.
Help DeepView
[ALT][H][D]
Use this command to open the on-line Help structure that explains the fea-
tures of DeepView. The Help structure also includes some simple fault find-
ing advice for the sub-sea components.
Table 61: DeepView Menu Commands (Continued)
Menu item
Sub-menu,
[hot key access]
and Function key
Description
350 Cable Survey System
Page 6-6 of 32 VT TSS Limited Issue 2.1 DPN 402197
Pre-dive Checklist
[ALT][H][P]
Use this command to open the on-line Help structure that explains the
checks you should make on the 350 System before you start a survey. Sub-
section 7.2.1 also lists and explains these checks. You may access the
checklist from within the DeepView Help structure.
About DeepView
[ALT][H][A]
This command displays the version number of DeepView.
Table 61: DeepView Menu Commands (Continued)
Menu item
Sub-menu,
[hot key access]
and Function key
Description
6 Operation software
DPN 402197 Issue 2.1 VT TSS Limited Page 6-7 of 32
6.2.1.1 DeepView File Menu Options
This section outlines the various displays that have been explained in the previous tables.
File Options
Open/Close, New Log File, Backup and Restore Configuration options bring up a standard
windows file location box. In the example used is the Open Log Menu.
Figure 61: An example of a File Option menu
Table 62: Internal Data Logging
You may add short comments (up to 40 characters in length) to the internal logged record by
pressing the annote button on the Run Display screen. The SDC time-tags and includes the
comments in the internal log. . The external logging record is unaffected by these annotations.
Note that you may measure how much disk space is available on the SDC by going to
My Computer selecting the hard disk and right clicking on the trackpad button or
pointing device and selecting properties.
Print Configuration
Select FilePrint Configuration to send a copy of the System Configuration to the Windows
Notepad application. You may edit the details and print them from this application.
B) Internal Data-logging
Note that, when enabled, internal logging must record up to approximately 1MB of data per hour. Ensure that the receiving
disk has sufficient free space to accept this volume of data.
Logging Enable: You must enable internal logging before you can use it. This is done by selecting New Log File
from the File options. The factory default is for internal logging to be disabled. Logging should also
be turned off when the survey is complete.
Logging Format: The records of the internal logging format include alternately the co-ordinates and the signals data
(see sub-section 7.2.2) When you enable internal logging, by default the SDC logs all records.
The SDC adds a time field to the start of logging and updates this at intervals of one minute. It
obtains this information from the SDC system clock.
350 Cable Survey System
Page 6-8 of 32 VT TSS Limited Issue 2.1 DPN 402197
Figure 62: An example of the Print Configuration via Windows Notepad
The ability to print the configuration is an important feature of DeepView. It allows you to create a
permanent written record of the configuration to supplement the survey logs.
Full analysis and post-processing of the raw data can be effective only if you retain a record of
the 350 System configuration at the time of the survey. Appendix D includes a suitable form for
you to record these details.
6.2.1.2 Run/ Display screen
Main Window
The Run Window is the most important and informative display of the 350 System. Anyone
who will operate or maintain the System should therefore spend some time to make them-
selves familiar with the layout of the window and the information that it shows.
A fold-out drawing of the Run Window is included at the back of this Manual. Open the draw-
ing and refer to it as you read the following description.
6 Operation software
DPN 402197 Issue 2.1 VT TSS Limited Page 6-9 of 32
Figure 63: DeepView - Run Window
Controls and Features of the Run Window
Controls
The Title Bar shows the names of the program and of the window. The right-hand end
includes the standard buttons to minimise, maximise and close the main DeepView win-
dow.
The Menu Bar includes the five menu headers described under Menu commands on
Page 2. To access the menu and sub-menu commands, click on them or use the appropriate
hot-key combination [ALT]+[underlined hot-key characters]. The Menu Bar also
includes buttons to minimise, maximise and close the Run Window.
The DeepView Toolbar includes the buttons described in section 6.2.3. This section out-
lines the various displays that have been explained in the previous tables. These tools con-
trol the functions of the DeepView for Windows program.
The Run Window Toolbar includes the buttons described under Run Window tools on
Page 8. These tools control functions within the Run Window only.
Features Rear Elevation pane
The rear elevation pane is immediately below the Run Window Toolbar and occupies approxi-
mately 30% of the area with the window fully maximised. It has a light blue background and
shows the target as a circle of fixed diameter, a vertical broken white line W that represents
the fixed centre-line of the ROV and the two search-coil arrays W.
350 Cable Survey System
Page 6-10 of 32 VT TSS Limited Issue 2.1 DPN 402197
The circle moves horizontally and vertically in the pane as the relative position of the target
changes. The scale W provides a visual reference so that you may estimate the vertical dis-
tance between the coil array and the target. CTRL H switches between 30, 15, 5 and 2 metre
vertical display scales.
When the 350 System includes a properly configured altimeter, the top edge of the solid
grey area shows the position of the seabed relative to the coil array. This area expands and con-
tracts vertically with changes in ROV altitude above the seabed. If the design of the ROV
allows you to configure the 350 System with a fixed coil height, the seabed indicator will
remain fixed at this altitude.
The Run Window includes a series of data fields that indicate the instantaneous measure-
ments of coil altitude (ALT) above the seabed, lateral offset (LAT) of the target relative to the
centre line, vertical range to the target (VRT) and target depth of cover (COV). The 350 Sys-
tem measures VRT and LAT directly, with positive measurements of LAT representing a star-
board offset relative to the centre line. Measurements of ALT arrive from an altimeter, or
represent the fixed coil height if this is applicable. DeepView calculates the value displayed in
the COV field using COV = VRTALT so that positive values indicate a target that is buried.
All measurement are in units of centimetres.
The solid white line W that separates the rear elevation pane from the snail trail pane
(described below) has gradations every 1m or 5m, depending on the swath width.
Two broken red lines W extend down the window at 2m of lateral offset. These show the lat-
eral limits of a quality control envelope applied by DeepView. To support efficient post-
processing on data acquired by the 350 System, the software sets the quality control flag in the
data output when the target is outside this envelope. Refer to sub-section 6.5 for a complete
description of the quality control features.
Features Snail Trail pane
The snail trail pane is immediately below the rear elevation pane and occupies approximately
60% of the screen area with the window fully maximised. It has a dark blue background and
indicates the lateral offset of the target, relative to the ROV centre line W, for the most recent
updates.
Two data panels and show the received signal voltages. In Run mode, the voltages
shown are measured simultaneously on the port vertical (PV), port lateral (PL), starboard ver-
tical (SV) and starboard lateral (SL) coils. The digital display panel uses scientific notation
to display the signal voltages in units of microvolts (V). The bargraphs use a logarithmic
scale. The use of scientific notation and log. scales allows strong and weak signals to be dis-
played simultaneously without the need to change scale.
The red dotted lines on show the threshold (section 6.1.1.2); on the drawing this is the
default setting of 100V. When the signal falls below the threshold value, the bargraph turns
red.
Panel displays the SEP details, System Clock, System Errors, External Output, Internal log
status. Panel shows the skew of the vehicle (the heading relative to the cable).
6 Operation software
DPN 402197 Issue 2.1 VT TSS Limited Page 6-11 of 32
A thick coloured line indicates the target position relative to the ROV centre line. As the
survey starts, this line extends upwards from the bottom of the screen until it reaches a point
near the top of the snail trail pane. The top of the line then continues to move to the left and
right as the lateral offset of the target changes while the remainder of the line scrolls vertically
downwards in a waterfall style of display.
Segments of the line can have any of three colours:
Light grey Good signals supplied by the coils. The target is covered.
Dark grey Good signals supplied by the coils. The target is exposed.
If the System receives no altitude information, a good target signal will always appears as a
light grey line.
Dark blue The lateral range is outside 2m. Note that if the target moves outside the lateral
range of the display (swath width), the pipe will turn red: increase the swath
width to rectify this.
Features Status bar
The status bar , located directly below the snail trail pane, alerts you to the operating sta-
tus of DeepView and the 350 System. It includes the following information:
Communication status.
This shows the DeepView operating mode (440 or 350) and the validity of serial communi-
cations between the SDC and the SEP. For successful operations in the 440 mode this
should always show 440 Data GOOD.
System time.
The system time is derived from the SDC system clock.
System errors.
The status bar shows the total number of uncleared system errors registered by DeepView.
Use the System Errors Window, described in sub-section 6.2.1.4, to see details of all the
system errors registered since you powered-on the SDC, up to a maximum of 600 lines.
Logging status.
Two fields in the status bar indicate the ON/OFF condition of the external output (used for log-
ging to a user-supplied data logger and to provide information for use by the optional video
overlay feature) and the internal logging.
Toggle Height Scale
Dependent upon specific survey requirements, the Height Scale Display W on the Run Win-
dow can be modified. For example, if a small target is being tracked a reduced height scale
may be required. This feature provides the user with control over the displayed height range.
The vertical ranges for the 350 System are either 0m to 2, 5, 10 or 15m.
350 Cable Survey System
Page 6-12 of 32 VT TSS Limited Issue 2.1 DPN 402197
Toggle Swath Width
Dependent on survey conditions, the lateral offset scale W can be changed between 2m and
15m. Note that the quality envelope will still be at 2m.
6.2.1.3 Forward Search Screen
The Forward Search screen provides a useful facility for ROV pilots: as described in 7.2, this
facility helps the pilot to steer the ROV on a track that intercepts the charted course of the tar-
get cable. It is intended that the heading of the ROV is approximately perpendicular to the
track of the cable.
Used in this way, the 350 System will detect the target ahead of the ROV and will display an
estimate of the forward range between the coil array and the target.
The forward range estimate relies upon information supplied by the coil array and the altimeter.
You cannot access this facility unless the system receives altitude information from an altimeter
or unless you have configured the software to use a fixed coil height. See Appendix A for a
description of the operating theory behind this function.
Figure 64: DeepView - Forward Search Window
Controls and Features of the Forward Search Window
Heading Display
The main part of the screen shows the ROV W , from above, and circles W concentric with the
ROV every 3m, to a maximum radius of 15m. A yellow arrow in the centre of the circles
6 Operation software
DPN 402197 Issue 2.1 VT TSS Limited Page 6-13 of 32
shows the ahead direction of the ROV. Superimposed on this is a representation of the cable
, showing its distance from the ROV and its relative heading.
The altitude, skew and distance to the target are all shown at the top of the screen. The
ALT field gives the height (taking into account any offset) above the seabed as measured by
the subsea altimeter. If the system is configured to use a fixed coil height, this value will be
steady and reflect this value. The skew angle gives the difference in heading between the vehi-
cle and the cable: a positive value indicates that the ROV must be steered towards the port side
to become perpendicular to the cable. The distance to target (FWD) gives an approximate
reading of the distance, in m, between the ROV and cable, measured between a point directly
below the ROV on the seabed, and the point on the cable which is directly ahead of the ROV.
Vertical Display
The lower part of the screen shows the positions of the ROV, seabed and target in the vertical
direction. The process of estimating the forward range of the target requires the System to
assume that the target is uncovered and lying on the seabed. For this reason, the target (repre-
sented by the grey cross is always shown on top of the line representing the seabed. The
vertical scale of this diagram W can be changed using the Toggle Height Scale in the
View menu, or the shortcut key [CTRL]-[H].
The distance to target is also shown on the graph as the line W. This distance is always meas-
ured along the seabed, and is not the shortest distance from the ROV to the target.
This window also displays the signal bars and coil voltages as shown on the Run/ Dis-
play screen. However, the vertical and fore-aft coil voltages are displayed in place of the verti-
cal and lateral signal voltages. By observing these values (in particular the bargraph display),
an experienced ROV pilot can detect and steer towards a target before any other indication
appears on the Forward Search display.
350 Cable Survey System
Page 6-14 of 32 VT TSS Limited Issue 2.1 DPN 402197
6.2.1.4 Other Windows
Scope and Spectrum Analyser Window
Deepview for Windows can show signal data received using either oscilloscope or spectrum
analyser displays.
Figure 65: Scope Window
The above screen shows an example of the 350 Oscilloscope Window with panels for two
active channels, Starboard Vertical and Starboard Lateral.
During operation, each of these display panels shows the signal voltage measured on their re-
spective channels against a horizontal time scale and a vertical scale of percentage of full scale
or V. In the example above, two panels are showing different timebase scales: both represent
the same frequency of approximately 100Hz.
Unless the signal from the target cable is very strong, you are unlikely to see a clearly defined
sine-wave oscillogram.
Figure 66: Spectrum Analyser Window
6 Operation software
DPN 402197 Issue 2.1 VT TSS Limited Page 6-15 of 32
The above screen shows an example of the 350 Spectrum Analyser Window with panels for
two active channels, Starboard Vertical and Starboard Lateral. This shows the system tracking
a 33Hz tone. The trace shows the expected peak at 33Hz, a peak at 50Hz (produced by the
mains power frequency) and harmonics of these frequencies at 66, 99 and 100Hz.
During operation each of these display panels shows the signal voltage measured on their
respective channels against a horizontal time scale and a vertical scale in volts. Note that the
vertical scale is logarithmic: each division represents a 10 times increase in voltage. The fre-
quency axis can be either 25, 50, 100 or 200Hz. Select a suitable axis to allow the tone fre-
quency to be displayed. The data can be displayed in two formats: either a graph drawn with a
continuous line or bars representing the strengths of each 1Hz band. To change between the
two views, press the small graph button to the bottom right of each graph.
The tone frequency is also shown on the display as a vertical white line. This can assist in
adjusting the tone frequency set in the Survey Parameters (section 6.1.1.1) to that present on
the cable. The threshold is also shown as a horizontal dotted line. In the drawing, this is at the
default setting of 100V.
Using and understanding the Spectrum Display is critical to setting up and using the 350 Cable
Survey System. It allows a check to be made that the tone frequency can be distinguished from
background noise. It also allows the presence of noise sources to be determined and identified.
System errors
The System Errors window, shown in Figure 67, displays a list of all errors and events
reported by the 350 System. The list includes cleared and uncleared errors. The window can
include up to 600 lines of text, with a scroll bar that allows you to search through the list.
When the list includes 600 lines of text, DeepView for Windows will delete the oldest message
in the list to provide room for any new ones.
Figure 67: System Errors window
The lines of text always have the format described in Table 63.
350 Cable Survey System
Page 6-16 of 32 VT TSS Limited Issue 2.1 DPN 402197
Table 63: System errors format
Notes:
1. Time and date information in the message line comes from the SDC system clock.
2. The five character Error Status field can contain ERROR, CLEAR or EVENT.
3. The message line can have any of four colours against the black background:
White indicates a cleared error.
Red indicates an uncleared error.
Yellow indicates an event.
Green indicates an information message.
The System Errors window includes a status line that has two data fields. These show the total
number of cleared and uncleared errors since you started DeepView for Windows.
Terminal Window
The Terminal Window, shown in Figure 68, allows you to send and view data to and from
the SEP and the altimeter. It has a toolbar, a client area that displays black text against a white
background, and a status bar.
The figure shows the Terminal Window displaying data packets from the 350 SEP in the client
area. If you select the altimeter as the active serial device, the client area will show data pack-
ets from this device instead.
6 Operation software
DPN 402197 Issue 2.1 VT TSS Limited Page 6-17 of 32
Figure 68: Terminal window
There is also a drop-down box that allows you to select the active serial device from among
those available. This box includes the option to use the Terminal Window as a dumb terminal
if necessary (also accessible by pressing [ALT][Down arrow] then release [ALT]).
The status line shows the communication port settings for the active serial device.
Video Overlay Enable
Enabling Video Overlay is covered in section 6.2.2.5 along with details of the configuration
options available.
Table 64: Terminal Window toolbar
Button Function Explanation
Enable/Disable SEP
polling
This button has a toggle action that pauses and resumes SEP polling with
alternate presses. With this button deselected, DeepView does not send the
necessary characters that request data packets from the SEP.
Terminal properties
[ALT][T]
Use this button to set the serial communication parameters for the active serial
device.
Connect This button allows you to connect the terminal to the active serial device.
Hang Up This button allows you to disconnect the terminal from the active serial device.
350 Cable Survey System
Page 6-18 of 32 VT TSS Limited Issue 2.1 DPN 402197
6.2.1.5 Configuration Options
Standard parameters
This option should be selected to configure the system parameters information.
Figure 69: System Configuration
6.2.2 Survey Parameters
This dialog contains the main parameter which the 350 SEP requires to track the tone and find
the position of the cable. To carry out an accurate survey, these parameters must be entered
correctly.
Tone Frequency
Set the tone frequency to the same frequency as the one on the cable. Enter the frequency of
the tone in units of Hz. The system accepts values from zero to 200Hz. Note that the rejection
capabilities of the system allow you to set the tone frequency accurately. An error of 1Hz or
more in setting the frequency could cause the system to reject the tone.
You may improve the performance of the System in the presence of background noise by using
the Spectrum Analyser (Section 6.2.1.4) display to select a suitable tone frequency.
Signal Threshold
Threshold is an absolute value in microvolts. The 350 system considers targets to be out of
range if signals from them are below the threshold setting.
You should determine the correct setting for the threshold empirically, considering the level of
noise present in the survey environment. Low values for threshold will yield an improvement
in the operating range, but will make the System more susceptible to noise.
6 Operation software
DPN 402197 Issue 2.1 VT TSS Limited Page 6-19 of 32
Figure 610: Threshold does not apply to vertical coils.
Note that the setting for the threshold applies only to the signals from the lateral coils (in Run
mode). This is because the null-response form the vertical coils extends vertically downwards
from the centre of each coil triad. Any target close to this null-response line will not produce
an output from the vertical coil even when located very close to it. For the same reason, the
threshold applies only to the fore-aft coils in the Forward Search mode.
Coil Separation
Set the tone frequency to the same frequency as the one on the cable. Enter the frequency of
the tone in units of Hz. The system accepts values from zero to 200Hz. Note that the rejection
capabilities of the system allow you to set the tone frequency accurately. An error of 1Hz or
more in setting the frequency could cause the system to reject the tone.
You may improve the performance of the System in the presence of background noise by using
the Spectrum Analyser (Section 6.2.1.4) display to select a suitable tone frequency.
The coil separation distance is a very important parameter. The accuracy of survey
measurements delivered by the 350 system depends on the accuracy with which you
measure this parameter.
Refer to Section 3.2.2 for instructions to mount the coils and adjust their separation
distance.
Tone Frequency Reminder Interval
To avoid potential deterioration in quality or loss of survey data you should perform a regular
check on the received tone signal and on the level of background noise.
Deepview provides three facilities that you may use to check on the quality of received sig-
nals:
The Run/Display screen (Section 6.2.1.2) and the Forward Search screen (Section 6.2.1.3)
both include a display of the signal voltages received on each channel.
The Spectrum analyser (Section 6.2.1.4) display shows a clear representation of the
received tone signal and the level of noise frequencies across the received band.
350 Cable Survey System
Page 6-20 of 32 VT TSS Limited Issue 2.1 DPN 402197
The oscilloscope display shows the actual received signal after amplification but before
signal processing. You may use this display to check for the effects of coil saturation (Sec-
tion 6.2.1.4).
At a pre-set interval, the System will remind you to check the tone frequency. Use the System
Parameters to set a suitable value for the reminder interval, up to a possible 360 minutes. The
default setting is 30 minutes. A setting of zero switches off the reminder facility, but you
should not use this setting.
Coil Calibration Constants
During manufacture of the 350 system, TSS takes every care to match the coils and their pre-
amplifiers to each other. However, there will inevitably be some small residual differences
between individual sensing coils.
Each of the sensing coils supplied by TSS has an identification plate that includes a calibration
constant. The 350 system requires this information so that it can compensate for the residual
differences between sensing coils.
During the coil installation process (Section 3.2.2), you should have recorded the calibration
constants for each of the six coils, together with their serial numbers and locations. The Con-
figuration Log form in Appendix D includes a suitable space for you to record these details.
TSS supplies the System with the port and starboard coil triads already assembled, and with
the SDC configured with the relevant calibration details. Use the System Parameters window
to check the calibration values are correctly configured.
If you exchange a sensing coil for any reason, enter the new five digit value for the calibration
constant in the relevant box on the screen. Do not change any other values.
Each of the six calibration constants will be different, and you must enter them carefully. The
numbers include an error-checking element that helps to ensure valid data entry.
6.2.2.1 Altimeter
The Altimeter option allows you to change the altimeter configuration for specific installations
and to view data transmitted by an altimeter connected directly to the SEP.
To view data transmitted by an altimeter connected to an SDC serial communication port, use
the Terminal Window described in sub-section 6.2.1.4.
6 Operation software
DPN 402197 Issue 2.1 VT TSS Limited Page 6-21 of 32
Figure 611: Altimeter Configuration
Use the Altimeter Configuration Window to set appropriate parameters for your altimeter:
The Altimeter Configuration Window allows you to select an SDC serial communication port
that you will use to accept data from the altimeter and to set its communication parameters.
Note that the 440 and 350 systems can have different offsets. Although a single altimeter is
present, its height above the 350 and 440 coils will be different.
The altimeter test allows you to see the serial data transmitted by an altimeter connected to the
SDC. The values shown will not have any meaning until the altimeter is immersed in water.
Altimeter Disabled
Fixed coil height
Sub-sea TSS* (see altimeter comms below)
PSA 900**
PSA 900 + depth**
PSA 9000**
Ulvertech Bathy
Simrad UK90
OSEL Bathy
SeaKing Bathy 704
Hyspec 305
Altimeter Comms Altimeter connected via Sub-sea Electronics Pod (for altimeters marked * and ** above)
Altimeter connected direct to a COM port (for altimeters marked ** and all other altimeters
above)
Fixed coil altitude If there is no altimeter fitted and the design of the ROV allows the coils to remain at a fixed altitude
above the seabed, enter this altitude in centimetres.
Altimeter offset Enter the height difference, in centimetres, between the reference line of the 350 coil array and the
transducer face of the altimeter. Use a positive value if the altimeter is above the coils.
350 Cable Survey System
Page 6-22 of 32 VT TSS Limited Issue 2.1 DPN 402197
Figure 612: Altimeter Test
Refer to sub-section 7.3.3 for a description of the data formats supplied by the compatible
altimeters.
6.2.2.2 External Data Logging
DeepView for Windows allows you to record the survey data acquired by the 350 System in
two ways:
A) External Output Configuration
Note that external logging is defaulted to on.
Output type: In 350 mode, the system always outputs a sentence which combines the signal and coordinate
information.
See sub-section 7.2.2 for a description of these data formats.
Output Rate: The SDC can transmit data to the data logger at either four records or one record per second. The
default setting is four records per second.
You should consider the available storage space and the desired linear track resolution for the sur-
vey before you decide between these alternatives.
External Output
Enabled
This box must be checked to enable the external output. If it is enabled, then a tick will appear
against the external output item in the configuration menu.
Configure Exter-
nal Serial Port
Options to configure, COM Port, Baud Rate, Data Bits, Parity and Stop Bits. See Figure 613.
6 Operation software
DPN 402197 Issue 2.1 VT TSS Limited Page 6-23 of 32
Figure 613: External Output Configuration and Serial Port menu
6.2.2.3 Analogue Output
Refer to Appendix B.1 for a full explanation of this feature.
6.2.2.4 Load Factory Defaults
Selecting this option will present a dialog box. Acceptance of this dialog will result in the SEP
settings being returned to their factory defaults. Certain parameters within DeepView will also
be returned to their default states (see Table 65).
6.2.2.5 Video Overlay Setup
The video overlay feature has been updated for version 8 SDC. It operates in the similar way
as the previous overlay by receiving a video signal arriving from a user supplied subsea cam-
era and overlaying it with the DeepView for Windows information specified by the user via the
Video Overlay Configuration. The Video Overlay Setup menu is available via the Configura-
tion options and provides the options illustrated below in Figure 614.
The video overlay has two possible modes. The first mode is where a copy of the SDC screen
(the Runview) is overlaid on the video output. This is selected with the "Duplicate Runview"
checkbox. The other mode is where selected information, for example the VRT and target
Table 65: Factory System Defaults
Parameter Default Value
Tone Frequency Reminder Interval 30 mins
Video Overlay Parameters COM5, 9600, 8, n, 1
External Output Comms Parameters COM3, 9600, 8, n, 1
External Output Packet Coords + signal, 4/second
Altimeter Comms Parameters COM port not specified, 9600, 8, n, 2
Altimeter Type Disabled
Altimeter Offset 0 cm
350 Cable Survey System
Page 6-24 of 32 VT TSS Limited Issue 2.1 DPN 402197
position, are overlaid. The positions and colours of each of these elements can be fully control-
led by the user.
Figure 614: Video Overlay Setup
Dependent upon the user's requirements they can enable/disable specific information.
As shown, they are also able to set the colours of Text, Signal Bars, Signal Trail and LAT Bar,
modify video mode and input/output connection.
These additional options provide the user with more control over the display to improve ease
of use.
The display overlaid on the external monitor from the DeepView software is shown in Figure
615. The video signal will be displayed behind this survey information where the black back-
ground is currently shown.
Figure 615: Video Overlay Signal
6 Operation software
DPN 402197 Issue 2.1 VT TSS Limited Page 6-25 of 32
The Overlay feature can be enabled/disabled either from the View options or by using the icon
on the toolbar.
Figure 616: Video Overlay Enable/Disable button
6.2.3 DeepView for Windows Icon Tools
Table 66 shows and explains the command buttons on the DeepView for Windows toolbar.
You may access these command buttons by clicking on them with the trackpad or external
pointing device. A tooltip appears to remind you of the button functions if you hover the
pointer over a button, with the same information also appearing in the status bar. You may also
access some of the button functions by pressing the appropriate function key from the Run
Window. Sub-section 6.2.4 lists all the available function keys that you may use in the 350
mode.
Table 66: DeepView Toolbar
Button
Function
and Function key
Explanation
Terminal Window
This button performs the same function as the ViewTerminal Window
command described above. The button has a toggle action so that the win-
dow will open and close with alternate presses. The normal condition is for
the Terminal Window to be closed when you start to use DeepView. Refer to
sub-section 6.2.1.4 for a full description of the Terminal Window.
System Errors Window
This button performs the same function as the ViewSystem Errors Win-
dow command described above. The button has a toggle action so that the
window will open and close with alternate presses. The normal condition is
for the System Errors Window to be closed when you start to use Deep-
View. Refer to sub-section 6.2.1.4 for a full description of the System Errors
Window.
Run Window
This button performs the same function as the ViewRun Window com-
mand described above. The button has a toggle action so that the window
will open and close with alternate presses. The normal condition is for the
Run Window to be closed when you start to use DeepView.
440/350 mode These buttons are available only if you operate the 350 System as part of a
Dualtrack installation when you may use them to select the operating mode.
When you press either of these buttons, Dualtrack enables the relevant
SEP and disables the other. The Run Window changes to suit the selected
operating mode. Refer to appendix B.2 for a description of Dualtrack.
440 coil drive
Function key [F5]
This button is not relevant to the 350 System. It will be available if you are
operating the 350 as part of a Dualtrack installation: refer to the 440 System
Manual for further details.
Background compen-
sation
This button is not relevant to the 350 System. It will be available if you are
operating the 350 as part of a Dualtrack installation: refer to the 440 System
Manual for further details.
350 Cable Survey System
Page 6-26 of 32 VT TSS Limited Issue 2.1 DPN 402197
Video overlay
Function key [F3]
This button has a toggle action that enables and disables the video overlay
with alternate presses. Refer to sub-section 6.2.2.5 for details of the video
overlay option.
Analogue output This button has a toggle action that enables and disables the analogue out-
put with alternate presses. Refer to appendix B.1 for details of the analogue
output option.
Table 66: DeepView Toolbar (Continued)
Button
Function
and Function key
Explanation
6 Operation software
DPN 402197 Issue 2.1 VT TSS Limited Page 6-27 of 32
Run Window tools
Table 67 shows and explains the command buttons on the Run Window toolbar. You may
also access some of the button functions by pressing the appropriate function key from the
Run Window. Sub-section 6.2.4 lists all the available function keys that you may use in the
350 mode.
6.2.4 DeepView for Windows Function Keys
Sub-section explains the menu commands and toolbar buttons available from within Deep-
View for Windows. You may access some of these commands and tools directly by pressing
the appropriate function key on the SDC. As a simple memory aid, press the function key [F1]
to see the help dialog panel shown in Figure 617. Note that this dialog panel is NOT part of
the DeepView for Windows on-line Help support.
Press any key to close the help dialog panel.
Table 67: Run Window Toolbar
Button Function Explanation
Show Run Window When in Forward Search mode (Section 6.2.1.3), switch to Run/ Display
mode.
Show Forward Search
Window
When in Run/Display mode (Section 6.2.1.2), switch to Forward Search
mode.
Annotations This button opens the text annotation feature available when you are creat-
ing an internal logging file. You may use the feature to add text comments,
of up to 40 characters in length, to the file. The comments will appear in the
status bar during replay of the file. The feature will not be available unless
you have configured DeepView to generate an internal logging file.
Help This button has a toggle action that opens and closes the DeepView func-
tion help panel described in sub-section 6.2.4.
350 Cable Survey System
Page 6-28 of 32 VT TSS Limited Issue 2.1 DPN 402197
Figure 617: DeepView function keys
Notes:
1. Function key combinations [CTRL]-[F6], [CTRL]-[F7] and [F5] are valid only when you
use the 350 System in a Dualtrack installation.
6.3 AFTER THE DIVE
Perform the following tasks after you complete a survey using the 350 System:
1. Print the configuration.
Select FilePrint Configuration to send a copy of the 350 System configuration details to
Window Notepad. Use this separate application to print the details so that you may retain
them with the survey records.
2. Close the logging files.
Select FileClose Log File to close the internal log file (if you have made one during the
survey). Command the external data logger to stop logging data from the 350 System.
3. Exit DeepView for Windows.
Select FileExit to exit the program. If necessary, use Windows Explorer to copy the
internally logged file to a separate disk to accompany the survey records. You might need
to compress the file using a separate program before you can transfer it to a diskette.
4. Exit Windows and power-off the SDC.
Select StartShut Down..., then choose Shut down and press OK to close the Windows
operating environment. Wait while Windows closes and then power-off the SDC when the
screen tells you that it is safe to do so.
6 Operation software
DPN 402197 Issue 2.1 VT TSS Limited Page 6-29 of 32
CAUTION
DO NOT power-off the SDC until it is safe to do so otherwise Windows will log the
fact that it was incorrectly closed. This will cause the SDC to enter a diagnostic check
automatically when you next operate it, extending the time that it takes for the 350 Sys-
tem to become operational after power-on.
If you power-off the SDC before Windows has closed properly, you might corrupt some
of the data logging files from the survey.
5. Power-off the sub-sea installation.
If you power-off the sub-sea installation before you close DeepView for Windows, the pro-
gram will register a communications failure.
6. Check the 350 System.
After you recover the ROV, perform all the post-survey checks and make any necessary
repairs to the 350 System before you store it. This helps to ensure the System will be ready
for immediate deployment when needed again. Use a fresh water hose to wash deposits of
salt and debris off the System.
Refer to Section 7 for a suggested survey procedure using the 350 System.
6.4 REPLAYING A LOG FILE
When you start to replay a log file an additional tool bar appears at the top of the run window.
Figure 618: Replay a log file screen
Figure 619: Replay toolbar keys
350 Cable Survey System
Page 6-30 of 32 VT TSS Limited Issue 2.1 DPN 402197
Table 68: Replay toolbar function keys
Button Function Explanation
Toggle height scale
Function key
Toggle swath width
Function key
Stop / Play / Pause
Function keys
Increase / Slow down
replay speed
Function keys
Jump to previous / next
annotation
Function keys
Jump to previous / next
event Function keys
Goto time
Function key
Help button Same as ctrl-F1
6 Operation software
DPN 402197 Issue 2.1 VT TSS Limited Page 6-31 of 32
6.5 QUALITY CONTROL
The Quality Control function of the 350 System defines an envelope within which the meas-
urements meet the specifications for accuracy listed in Section 8.
Whenever the co-ordinates of the target fall outside the limits of the Quality Control envelope,
the following occurs:
The target shown on the Run Display screen changes colour.
A message appears on the screen to identify the reason for quality control failure.
The output strings to an external data logger include the quality control indicator and iden-
tification number. The two-digit identification number allows post-processing engineers to
identify the quality control failure. Refer to sub-section 7.3.1 for details of the QC check
code.
The audible alarm on the SDC sounds (if you have enabled this feature).
The extremities of the Quality Control envelope are as follows:
A) Lateral extremities:
If the target falls outside a swath range of 2.0m from the centre of the coil array, then the
Quality Control flag will be set. These extremities appear on the Run Display screen as two
vertical broken red lines.
B) Vertical extremity:
If the signal strength on either of the lateral sensing coils falls to below 50V, then the Quality
Control flag will be set.
The quality control flag does NOT mean that the measurements contain errors. It
merely indicates to the post-processing team that the vertical range to target or the lat-
eral offset has exceeded pre-defined limits. The post-processing engineers can use
this flag to help them analyse the acquired data more easily.
350 Cable Survey System
Page 6-32 of 32 VT TSS Limited Issue 2.1 DPN 402197
7 Operating Procedure
DPN 402197 Issue 2.1 TSS (UK) Limited Page 7-1 of 28
7 OPERATING PROCEDURE
In common with other items of precision equipment, you may rely on the quality of data gath-
ered by the 350 System only if you follow the correct operating procedures when you use it.
This section of the Manual considers the role that the 350 System plays within an overall sur-
vey operation. The sub-sections follow a typical survey operation in sequence: It begins with
the preparation necessary before the survey, includes some operational considerations, and
ends with some suggestions for the effective use of the quality control information.
This is an important section of the 350 Manual and contains information to help you
complete a survey operation successfully. However, you should always follow specific
advice and instructions provided by the survey planning team if these conflict with the
suggestions in this Manual.
If necessary, contact TSS for advice on operational and technical issues concerning
the 350 System. The title page of this Manual lists the contact details for TSS (UK) Lim-
ited. The DeepView Help system also lists the contact details of TSS offices in Aber-
deen and Houston.
7.1 Before the Survey Page 2
Details that must be considered during the period leading up to a survey. This sub-section will
be of particular interest to Survey Planners and their clients.
7.2 During the survey Page 4
The correct operating procedure for the 350 System during a survey. The level of System-spe-
cific information included in this sub-section will be useful to engineers directly involved with
the survey operation.
7.4 After the Survey Page 19
To maintain the 350 System in good working order it is important to perform these simple
tasks after you complete the survey and recover the ROV.
To allow for meaningful analysis of the acquired data, the 350 System allows you to
keep a record of the System configuration during a survey. The operating software
DeepView generates this information and makes it available for editing and printing
through the Windows Notepad application.
7.5 Operational Considerations Page 20
Some potential sources of error that you might encounter during a survey and some sugges-
tions for avoiding them.
7.6 ROVs Page 28
The 350 System is suitable for installation and use on board a wide range of ROV types.
350 Cable Survey System
Page 7-2 of 28 TSS (UK) Limited Issue 2.1 DPN 402197
7.1 BEFORE THE SURVEY
You should include the following considerations in the survey planning scheme:
1. Personnel and equipment availability.
Check the availability of a working 350 System and a TSS-trained operator for the period
of the survey. Refer to sub-section 7.1.1.
2. Tone frequency.
Choose a frequency for the tone, taking into account details such as the length of the cable
and the noise levels in the received bandwidth of the 350 System. Refer to sub-section
7.1.2.
3. Survey requirements.
Define the type of survey and consider the possible compromise between acceptable meas-
urement accuracy and the time it takes to complete the survey. Refer to sub-section 7.1.3.
4. Installation requirements. Refer to sub-section 7.1.4
Contact TSS for advice if necessary. You will find the contact details for TSS (UK) Lim-
ited on the title page of this Manual.
7.1.1 Personnel and Equipment Availability
When used properly, the TSS 350 System is a precision survey tool that provides valuable and
detailed survey data to describe the track of a conductive target through the survey area.
It is in the interest of the Survey Planners to ensure that appropriate personnel attend one of
the TSS Training Courses. Two levels of 350 Training Course are available. Refer to
Appendix B.3 for a description of each course.
Ensure that a 350 System in good working order and with a complete kit of spare parts will be
available at the time of the survey operation.
7 Operating Procedure
DPN 402197 Issue 2.1 TSS (UK) Limited Page 7-3 of 28
7.1.2 Tone Frequency
Your choice of tone frequency that you inject onto the target cable should take account of sev-
eral factors, including:
Specific requirements of the survey planning team.
The length of the target cable.
The distributed capacitance between the cable and sea water attenuates high tone frequen-
cies more rapidly than low tone frequencies. For this reason, surveys on long cables might
be easier to conduct if you select a frequency near the lower end of the acceptable range.
However, the 350 System is more sensitive to high frequencies than low, and the System
can therefore detect the cable at a greater range when you select a high frequency tone.
Noise in the survey area.
High levels of background noise will reduce the ability of the 350 System to calculate the
target co-ordinates accurately, particularly when the tone exists at a low amplitude. Use the
Scope and Spectrum Analyser window of DeepView to find a relatively quiet part of the
band and try to set a tone frequency within that region of the band.
Refer to Appendix C.1 for further relevant details.
7.1.3 Survey Requirements
During the early stages, the survey planning team will need to define the type of data required
from the survey:
The 350 System can complete a quick and simple check on the track and depth of cover of
a target by making a series of widely spaced measurements.
Alternatively, to work to the highest achievable accuracy, you might need to stop the ROV
at carefully specified intervals to perform accurate measurements on the target and to
measure the mean seabed level with a separate profiling system.
The 350 System always delivers measurements of the highest achievable accuracy
under the given conditions. The compromise that you need to make between survey
accuracy and operating speed arises from the need to manoeuvre and measure the
position of the ROV with greater precision when you demand a sharper survey resolu-
tion.
7.1.4 Installation Requirements
Before starting a survey the survey planning team should define the installation requirements
of the 350 System. They should consider:
The type of ROV to be used and where the SEP and the coils will be mounted. The 350
System is suitable for use on most types of ROV, including towed sleds. TSS can offer fur-
ther advice if necessary.
Which communication method to use between the SEP and the SDC. This will depend
upon the characteristics of the umbilical cable. See Section 4 for guidance.
Whether to use an altimeter or a rapid update profiler, and their location on the ROV.
350 Cable Survey System
Page 7-4 of 28 TSS (UK) Limited Issue 2.1 DPN 402197
The type and capacity of data logger, and its connection and communication requirements.
Check that the data logger will be compatible with the data format supplied by the 350
System.
TSS recommends that you should generate a written or printed copy of the System config-
uration before and again after the survey. This will be useful source of reference during the
data analysis phase of the survey. This recommendation means you should arrange to con-
nect a suitable printer to the SDC LPT1 port.
The on board facilities for creating, displaying and recording video images from a sub-sea
camera mounted on the ROV. Consider using the video facilities to record the installation
procedure of the 350 System.
The standard 350 System includes a field support kit (FSK) for use with the sub-sea installa-
tion. Only engineers who have attended Part 2 of the relevant TSS training course should use
the FSK.
As an option, TSS can provide an Analogue Output capability on the SDC. This option pro-
vides an output voltage, proportional to the lateral offset of the target, for the control of a
tracked ROV that has an automatic steering facility.
7.2 DURING THE SURVEY
This sub-section lists and explains a basic series of suggested operations and proce-
dures to include in a survey that uses the 350 System. However, you should always fol-
low the specific requirements of the survey planning team, who may require you to
modify or add to these procedures. Contact TSS for advice if necessary.
The DeepView Run Window, described in sub-section 6.2.1.2, provides access to all the facil-
ities you will need during a survey that involves the 350 System. By referring to this window
and other features of DeepView, perform the survey:
1. Safety and pre-dive checks.
Make a series of checks on the installation before you deploy the ROV. See sub-section
7.2.1.
2. Print the System configuration details.
Select FilePrint Configuration in the DeepView toolbar to send a copy of the 350 Sys-
tem details to the Windows Notepad application. You should print the details from this
application and save the printed copy with the survey records.
3. Deploy the ROV.
Begin the survey with the ROV close to the expected target position.
4. Check signals from the SEP.
Use the Scope and Spectrum Analyser window again to confirm that the SEP is receiving
signals (tone, mains frequency, harmonics and noise) on all channels. Check for valid sig-
nals from the sub-sea altimeter.
7 Operating Procedure
DPN 402197 Issue 2.1 TSS (UK) Limited Page 7-5 of 28
5. Manoeuvre the ROV over the target.
Use the forward search feature of DeepView to locate a target that crosses the path of the
ROV and then use the signal strength bars and the Run Window to steer along its course.
Figure 71: Using the forward search mode
6. Perform the main survey:
Log all survey data. The main function of the 350 System is to acquire and log survey data
for subsequent analysis. DeepView can log data both internally, on the SDC hard disk, and
externally to a data logger. You should use the external data logging facility to store the
primary survey log. See sub-section 7.2.2.
Perform regular checks on the signal received at the tone frequency. Take any action neces-
sary to restore deteriorating performance.
Operate the ROV and the 350 System so as to control those factors that might degrade the
survey results. Refer to sub-section 7.3 for some important operational considerations.
7. On completing the survey.
Perform a series of simple procedures to safeguard the logged data and maintain the 350
System in good condition ready for the next survey. Refer to sub-section 7.4.
350 Cable Survey System
Page 7-6 of 28 TSS (UK) Limited Issue 2.1 DPN 402197
7.2.1 Safety and Pre-dive checks
This section describes a series of checks that you should perform on the 350 System before
you deploy the ROV and start the survey. Perform these checks carefully, noting any safety
issues as you do so:
Check the installation of the coil array (section 3.2.2). Ensure that the coil connectors will
not be fouled by any manipulators etc., or damaged as the ROV is recovered. Ensure the
coil separation distance has been measured correctly, and entered into the top end display
software (section 6.1.1.3).
Check that all cables are undamaged and secured.
Ensure the survey will not exceed the depth rating of the SEP. Most systems are rated to
3000m, but check the warning on Page 3.
Ensure all subsea connectors are mated correctly (section 4.1.2) and that blanking plugs
are fitted to any unused ports.
Check that DeepView has been configured with the coil calibration constants correctly
(section 6.2.2)
To check the operation of the system:
Use the frequency spectrum display of the 350 System (see sub-section 6.2.1.4) and check
that the SDC receives signals correctly on all channels. Repeat this test with the ROV in
the water.
Perform an altimeter test (sub-section 6.2.2.1) and check that the SEP or SDC receives
data packets correctly from the altimeter. Repeat the test in water.
CAUTIONS
Make certain the SDC and its connection cables are secured so that they cannot fall or
present a hazard to personnel.
Allow only properly qualified engineers to work on the 350 System.
The supply connector is a safety feature that allows the system to be isolated easily from
the electrical supply. Hand tighten the connector only. Position the connector to allow
easy access for disconnection.
Ensure there are proper blanking plugs fitted to any unused ports on the SEP.
Details of the pre-dive checks are also available in the DeepView on-line help system.
7.2.2 Data Logging
To provide the post-processing engineers with a detailed account of the survey it is important
to maintain a full log of events as they occur during a survey.
The survey log should therefore include:
The data logged to an external logger
7 Operating Procedure
DPN 402197 Issue 2.1 TSS (UK) Limited Page 7-7 of 28
The video recording of the 350 System installation and configuration procedures (if one
has been made)
The video recordings from cameras on board the ROV
Details of any events, such as ROV collisions, that may have occurred during the survey,
and the effect that they may have had upon the survey. You should also record any correc-
tive action taken.
Printed or hand-written sheets containing the System configuration details that were taken
at the start and at the end of the survey
Any other information requested by the survey planning team
7.2.3 Replay Logged Data
You cannot use the display software on the SDC to replay externally logged files.
To replay a previously logged data file you have to select Open/Close Replay file [F2] from
the file option from within DeepView for Windows. This will provide you with the following
dialog box to select the file you require. The location of these files by default is a Logs folder
within the DeepView for Windows directory, but this can be changed by the user to another
directory, or to a floppy disk in drive A of the SDC.
Externally logged data files include data packets of fixed length that supply all the infor-
mation required for a full analysis of the survey. The file includes target co-ordinates, sig-
nal values and important quality control information generated by the 350 System during
the survey. You should use this logging method to generate the primary survey recording.
Externally logged files will usually be stored on a separate data logger along with files
generated by other items of survey equipment. The data logger will time stamp data pack-
ets that it receives so that the records may be synchronised accurately during the analysis
operation. For this reason, DeepView does not include a time field in the external data
packets. Refer to sub-section 6.2.2.2 for a description of the external logging format.
Internally logged files are of variable length and include all data transmitted to the SDC by
the SEP (target co-ordinates, signal values and, possibly, information needed by the Scope
and Spectrum Analyser window). The data packets also include comment lines that
describe the SEP type and other System information, a time stamp and any text annota-
tions supplied by the user. The internal logging format does NOT include the quality con-
trol information.
Refer to sub-section 7.3.2 for a description of the internal logging format.
The internal logging facility is for test purposes and for the convenience of operators
only. You should not use it to record the main survey log.
External logging and internal logging use different data formats that are not compatible
with each other. You cannot use the SDC to replay an externally logged file.
350 Cable Survey System
Page 7-8 of 28 TSS (UK) Limited Issue 2.1 DPN 402197
DeepView for Windows allows you to configure an SDC serial port for communication with
the external data logger. This option is covered in Section 6.2.2.2. Refer to the technical man-
ual of your data logger for the correct communication parameters.
7.3 DATA FORMATS
This section describes both the external format and the sentences used internally.
7.3.1 External Logging Format
The output from the SDC to a data logger includes a Quality Control flag and identification
codes generated by the 350 System. Post-processing engineers can use this additional informa-
tion to modify the plot of the target profile to identify areas where the flag is set.
This simple facility allows a rapid visual analysis of the information, and quickly shows any
areas where the engineers should examine the data more closely.
The quality control flag does NOT mean that the measurements contain errors. It
merely indicates to the post-processing team that the vertical range to target or the lat-
eral offset has exceeded pre-defined limits. The post-processing engineers can use
this flag to help them analyse the acquired data more easily.
7.3.1.1 Co-ordinates and Signals Format
In survey mode, the following sentence is transmitted.
Table 71: External Output format - Survey Mode
Notes:
1. The Start character is a colon ASCII 3Ah.
2. S (ASCII 60h) identifies survey mode packet.
3. The Quality Control (QC) flag will be a space character when RESET, or a question mark
(? ASCII 3Fh) if set. See also the QC code later in this packet.
4. The lateral offset (LAT) is measured from the centre of the coil array. Positive values indi-
cate a target to starboard of the centre line. The field will contain question marks if the tar-
get is out of range.
:SQLLLL VVVV AAAACCCCSSS 1111 2222 3333 4444 5555 6666 QQ[CR][LF]
S
t
a
r
t
c
h
a
r
a
c
t
e
r
(
N
o
t
e
1
)
P
a
c
k
e
t
i
d
e
n
t
i
f
i
e
r
(
N
o
t
e
2
)
S
p
a
c
e
c
h
a
r
a
c
t
e
r
S
p
a
c
e
c
h
a
r
a
c
t
e
r
S
p
a
c
e
c
h
a
r
a
c
t
e
r
S
p
a
c
e
c
h
a
r
a
c
t
e
r
S
p
a
c
e
c
h
a
r
a
c
t
e
r
S
p
a
c
e
c
h
a
r
a
c
t
e
r
S
p
a
c
e
c
h
a
r
a
c
t
e
r
S
p
a
c
e
c
h
a
r
a
c
t
e
r
S
p
a
c
e
c
h
a
r
a
c
t
e
r
Q
C
c
h
e
c
k
c
o
d
e
(
N
o
t
e
1
0
)
L
a
t
e
r
a
l
o
f
f
s
e
t
(
N
o
t
e
4
)
V
e
r
t
i
c
a
l
r
a
n
g
e
t
o
t
a
r
g
e
t
(
N
o
t
e
5
)
C
o
i
l
a
l
t
i
t
u
d
e
(
N
o
t
e
6
)
T
a
r
g
e
t
d
e
p
t
h
o
f
c
o
v
e
r
(
N
o
t
e
7
)
S
k
e
w
a
n
g
l
e
(
N
o
t
e
8
)
S
i
g
n
a
l
s
t
r
e
n
g
t
h
o
n
c
h
a
n
n
e
l
1
(
N
o
t
e
9
)
S
i
g
n
a
l
s
t
r
e
n
g
t
h
o
n
c
h
a
n
n
e
l
2
(
N
o
t
e
9
)
S
i
g
n
a
l
s
t
r
e
n
g
t
h
o
n
c
h
a
n
n
e
l
3
(
N
o
t
e
9
)
S
i
g
n
a
l
s
t
r
e
n
g
t
h
o
n
c
h
a
n
n
e
l
4
(
N
o
t
e
9
)
S
i
g
n
a
l
s
t
r
e
n
g
t
h
o
n
c
h
a
n
n
e
l
5
(
N
o
t
e
9
)
S
i
g
n
a
l
s
t
r
e
n
g
t
h
o
n
c
h
a
n
n
e
l
6
(
N
o
t
e
9
)
C
a
r
r
i
a
g
e
r
e
t
u
r
n
l
i
n
e
-
f
e
e
d
t
e
r
m
i
n
a
t
i
o
n
Q
C
f
l
a
g
(
N
o
t
e
3
)
7 Operating Procedure
DPN 402197 Issue 2.1 TSS (UK) Limited Page 7-9 of 28
5. The vertical range to target (VRT) is the distance between the centreline of the coil array
and the target. There are several conditions that will cause the field to contain question
marks:
The target is out of range
The 350 System cannot compute an accurate position for the target
Coil saturation has occurred because the tone signal is too strong.
6. Coil altitude (ALT) information comes from an altimeter if the System includes one. Oth-
erwise, the information in this field will be the fixed coil height if available. The field will
contain question marks if there is no fixed height or altimeter information available.
7. The SDC calculates the target depth of cover (COV) using COV = VRT ALT. A positive
value indicates the target is covered. Zero or negative values indicate an exposed target.
There are several conditions that will cause the field to contain question marks:
The target is out of range
The 350 System cannot compute an accurate position for the target
Coil saturation has occurred
There is no fixed coil height or information available to the SDC from an altimeter
8. The skew angle in the range -90 to +90 degrees. This field will contain question marks if
the System cannot measure skew angle. Zero skew is the ideal situation where the ROV
aligns on the same heading as the direction of the target. Skew is positive when ROV head-
ing is to starboard of the target direction.
9. The signal strengths, in microvolts, measured on channel 1 (starboard lateral SL), chan-
nel 2 (starboard vertical SV), channel 3 (port lateral PL), channel 4 (port vertical
PV), channel 5 (starboard fore-aft SF) and channel 6 (port fore-aft PF).
Information included in the above signal strength fields may have a very large dynamic
range, extending from less than 1V to more than 7 volts. To allow for simple encoding of
this range, the System displays and logs values using scientific notation:
The signal value format is: abbc where the actual value is a.bb e+c V
For example:
The field +1234 represents a value of 1.23 10
4
microvolts (or 12.3 mV). The SDC
would display this on the Run Display screen as +1.23e4 in the lower left-hand data
panel.
The field +2416 represents a value 2.41 10
6
microvolts (or 2.41 volts). The SDC
would display this on the Run Display screen as +2.41e6 in the lower left-hand data
panel.
350 Cable Survey System
Page 7-10 of 28 TSS (UK) Limited Issue 2.1 DPN 402197
10. The QC check code provides additional status information that explains any occurrence of
the QC flag being set. The check code consists of a two-digit number in the range 01 to 07
and 99 with the meanings defined in Table 72.
7.3.1.2 Forward Search mode
The string is 48 characters long with individual field definitions as follows. The SDC logs all
distances in units of centimetres and signal voltages in units of microvolts using the scientific
notation. The values in the packet are rounded and it is possible that they will not precisely
match those on the Forward Search screen.
Table 73: External logging format Forward search mode
Notes:
1. The Start character is a colon.
2. F identifies a packet from the Forward search mode. The SDC transmits this type of
packet whenever it is displaying the Forward Search screen.
Table 72: QC check code meaning Survey mode
QC Check
Code
Meaning
00 Target in range. SL and PL 50V; LAT 2m. Quality flag is RESET.
01 Target in range. SL or PL <50V; LAT 2m. Quality flag is SET.
02 Target in range. SL or PL 50V; LAT >2m. Quality flag is SET.
03 Target in range. SL or PL <50V; LAT >2m. Quality flag is SET.
04 Starboard tracking data only; LAT = ????, VRT = ????, SKEW = ???. Quality flag is SET.
05 Port tracking data only; LAT = ????, VRT = ????, SKEW = ???. Quality flag is SET.
06 Skew angle not available. Skew angle = ???. Quality flag is SET.
07 Saturation in one or more coils. Quality flag is SET. The SDC displays a warning banner on the Run Dis-
play screen.
99 Target out of range. VRT and LAT = ????. SKEW = ???. Quality flag is SET.
7 Operating Procedure
DPN 402197 Issue 2.1 TSS (UK) Limited Page 7-11 of 28
3. The Quality Control (QC) flag will be a space character when RESET, or a question mark
(?) when SET. See also the QC check code later in this packet.
4. The forward search range (FWD) is measured from the reference line of the coil array
(identified in Figure 32). There are several conditions that will cause the field to contain
question marks:
The target is out of range
The 350 System cannot compute an accurate position for the target
Coil saturation has occurred because the tone signal is too strong
5. Coil altitude (ALT) information comes from an altimeter if the System includes one. Oth-
erwise, the information in this field will be the fixed coil height if available. Forward
search mode is available only if information is available concerning the height of the coils
above the seabed, and so this field will always contain information.
6. The signal strengths, in microvolts, measured on channel 1 (starboard lateral SL), chan-
nel 2 (starboard vertical SV), channel 3 (port lateral PL), channel 4 (port vertical
PV), channel 5 (starboard fore-aft SF) and channel 6 (port fore-aft PF).
Information included in the above signal strength fields may have a very large dynamic
range, extending from less than 1V to more than 7 volts. To allow for simple encoding of
this range, the System displays and logs values using the scientific notation explained on
page 9.
7. The QC check code provides additional status information that explains any occurrence of
the QC flag being set. The check code consists of a two-digit number with the meanings
defined in Table 74.
7.3.2 Internal Logging Format
Data packets transmitted by the SEP fall into two categories co-ordinates and signals.
The SEP transmits them sequentially so that either packet A1 or A2 below immediately
precedes packet B.
A1) Co-ordinates Data Packet Survey mode
The string is 23 characters long with individual field definitions as follows. The SDC logs all
distances in units of centimetres and skew angles in units of degrees. The values in the packet
Table 74: QC check code meaning Forward search mode
QC Check
Code
Meaning
00 Target in range. SF and PF 50V; LAT 2m. Quality flag is RESET.
07 Saturation in one or more coils. Quality flag is SET.
08 Target in range. SF or PF <50V. Quality flag is SET.
99 Target out of range. FWD = 9999. Quality flag is SET.
350 Cable Survey System
Page 7-12 of 28 TSS (UK) Limited Issue 2.1 DPN 402197
are rounded and it is possible that they will not precisely match those on the Run Display
screen.
Table 75: Internal logging format Survey co-ordinates
Notes:
1. The Start character is a colon.
2. The number of coils in the 350 System is always 6.
3. Coil altitude (ALT) information comes from an altimeter if the System includes one. Oth-
erwise, the information in this field will be the fixed coil height if available. If there is no
altitude information available the field will contain three space characters and a zero.
4. The lateral offset (LAT) is measured from the centre of the coil array. Positive values indi-
cate a target to starboard of the centre line. The field will contain question marks if the tar-
get is out of range.
5. The vertical range to target (VRT) is the distance between the reference line of the coil
array (identified in Figure 32) and the target. The value is always positive. There are sev-
eral conditions that will cause the field to contain question marks:
The target is out of range
The 350 System cannot compute an accurate position for the target
Coil saturation has occurred because the tone signal is too strong
6. Skew angle between the target and the ROV in the range 90 to +90. Zero skew is the
ideal situation where the ROV aligns on the same heading as the direction of the target.
Skew is positive when the ROV heading is to starboard of the target direction. The field
will contain question marks if the 350 System cannot measure the skew angle.
A2) Co-ordinates Data Packet Forward Search mode
The string is 23 characters long with individual field definitions as follows. The SDC logs all
distances in units of centimetres and skew angles in units of degrees. The values in the packet
are rounded and it is possible that they will not precisely match those on the Forward Search
screen.
7 Operating Procedure
DPN 402197 Issue 2.1 TSS (UK) Limited Page 7-13 of 28
Table 76: Internal logging format Forward search mode
Notes:
1. The Start character is a colon.
2. The number of coils in the 350 System is always 6.
3. Coil altitude (ALT) information comes from an altimeter if the System includes one. Oth-
erwise, the information in this field will be the fixed coil height if available. Forward
search mode works only if information is available concerning the height of the coils
above the seabed, and so this field will always contain information.
4. The forward search range to the target (FWD) is the estimated distance from the coil array
to the target. There are several conditions that will cause the field to contain question
marks:
The target is out of range
The 350 System cannot compute an accurate position for the target
Coil saturation has occurred because the tone signal is too strong
5. Skew angle between the target and the ROV in the range 90 to +90. Zero skew is the
ideal situation where the ROV aligns on the same heading as the direction of the target.
Skew is positive when the ROV heading is to starboard of the target direction. The field
will contain question marks if the 350 System cannot measure the skew angle.
B) Signals Data Packet (both operating modes)
The string is 34 characters long with individual field definitions as follows. The SDC logs all
signal voltages in units of microvolts.
350 Cable Survey System
Page 7-14 of 28 TSS (UK) Limited Issue 2.1 DPN 402197
Table 77: Internal logging format Signals packet
Notes:
1. The Start character is a colon.
2. The signal strengths, in microvolts, measured on channel 1 (starboard lateral SL), chan-
nel 2 (starboard vertical SV), channel 3 (port lateral PL), channel 4 (port vertical
PV), channel 5 (starboard fore-aft SF) and channel 6 (port fore-aft PF).
Information included in the above signal strength fields may have a very large dynamic
range, extending from less than 1V to more than 7 volts. To allow for simple encoding of
this range, the System displays and logs values using the scientific notation explained on
page 9.
Each time the SEP receives a single carriage-return line-feed sequence from the SDC, it trans-
mits either packet A1 or packet A2, followed immediately by packet B.
7.3.3 Altimeter Data Format
You may use certain types of altimeter manufactured by Datasonics, Ulvertech, Simrad and
OSEL with the 350 System.
Refer to sub-section 4.1.5 for instructions to connect one of these alternative types of altimeter
to the SDC. You may connect the Datasonics unit either to the SDC ALTIMETER COM2
port or directly to the SEP Altimeter port.
You must configure the display software to use your altimeter type. Refer to the instructions in
sub-section 6.2.2.1 for instructions to do this.
The descriptions below include the individual data formats and the RS232 parameters for each
type of altimeter that you may use with the 350 System. Except for the OSEL altimeter, trans-
mission starts immediately after power-on.
Note that DeepView removes all spaces present in the altimeter string before interpretation.
This is because the UK90 format sometimes includes extra spaces which are not defined in its
specification. This removal of spaces applies to all types of altimeters which are connected
directly to the SDC.
7 Operating Procedure
DPN 402197 Issue 2.1 TSS (UK) Limited Page 7-15 of 28
7.3.3.1 Datasonics PSA 900 and PSA 9000
The transmission formats for the TSS altimeter, and the Datasonics PSA 900 and PSA 9000
are identical. They transmit data at 2400 baud using 7 data bits, 1 start bit, 1 mark bit and 1
stop bit.
Table 78: Altimeter output format TSS and Datasonics
If the Datasonics PSA 900 includes the optional pressure transducer, the data string becomes:
Table 79: Altimeter output format Datasonics with pressure transducer
7.3.3.2 Ulvertech Bathymetric System
The Ulvertech Bathymetric system transmits data at 9600 baud using 8 data bits, 1 stop bit and
no parity.
350 Cable Survey System
Page 7-16 of 28 TSS (UK) Limited Issue 2.1 DPN 402197
Table 710: Altimeter output format Ulvertech Bathymetric system
7.3.3.3 Simrad UK90
The Simrad UK90 transmits data at 4800 baud using 8 data bits, 2 stop bits and no parity.
Table 711: Altimeter output format Simrad UK90
Notes:
1. The Simrad UK90 altimeter measures altitude at twice the rate that it measures depth. It
therefore includes the altitude field twice in each data packet, separated by a space charac-
ter. Both altitude fields will contain similar values because it is unlikely the altitude will
change significantly during the short interval between the two measurements.
2. The contents of these output data fields are set externally and have no effect on operation
of the 350 System.
7.3.3.4 OSEL Bathymetric System
The OSEL Bathymetric system transmits data at 9600 baud using 8 data bits, 1 stop bit and no
parity.
7 Operating Procedure
DPN 402197 Issue 2.1 TSS (UK) Limited Page 7-17 of 28
Table 712: Altimeter output format OSEL bathymetric system
The OSEL altimeter must receive the interrogating character uppercase D from the
SDC before it transmits each data string. The communication link between the OSEL
altimeter and the SDC must therefore be bi-directional. The SDC transmits the interro-
gating character automatically when configured to use the OSEL altimeter.
7.3.3.5 Tritech SeaKing Bathy 704
The SeaKing Bathy system transmits data continuously using RS232 communications at 9600
baud.
350 Cable Survey System
Page 7-18 of 28 TSS (UK) Limited Issue 2.1 DPN 402197
Table 713: Tritech SeaKing Bathy format
Notes:
1. The SDC performs the following calculation to calculate the altitude above the seabed:
Altitude = ((Altimeter reading 200ns) velocity of sound) 2
For example, if the count were 162712, then:
Altitude = ((162712 200ns) 1475) 2 = 24.000 metres
This is the true distance from the transducer face of the altimeter to the seabed.
7 Operating Procedure
DPN 402197 Issue 2.1 TSS (UK) Limited Page 7-19 of 28
7.4 AFTER THE SURVEY
To maintain the 350 System in good condition you should perform the following important
tasks after you complete the survey and recover the ROV:
Print the System configuration details again. Select FilePrint Configuration in the Deep-
View toolbar to send a copy of the 350 System details to the Windows Notepad applica-
tion. Save the printed copy with the survey records.
Recover the ROV.
Close the internal and external log files and create backup copies of them. Include a copy
of the external log file with the survey records.
Power-off the 350 System.
Use a fresh water hose to wash salt and debris off the ROV-mounted components of the
350 System. Inspect all components, cables and connectors of the installation carefully
and make any repairs necessary.
Check the contents of the field support kit and order any parts needed to replenish it.
350 Cable Survey System
Page 7-20 of 28 TSS (UK) Limited Issue 2.1 DPN 402197
7.5 OPERATIONAL CONSIDERATIONS
7.5.1 Operating Performance
Together with the skilful operation of the 350 System, two major factors influence the
response and the performance of the System during survey operations:
1. Frequency of the target tone
You may minimise the effects of background noise by selecting a tone that is in a relatively
quiet part of the received band of frequencies. The Scope and Spectrum Analyser window of
DeepView helps you make this selection. Refer to sub-section 6.2.1.4 for a description of this
window.
2. Coil arrangement on the ROV
The performance of the 350 System depends heavily on the mounting arrangements of the coil
array. You need to consider two factors carefully when you use the System:
Because the 350 System uses trigonometry to determine the target co-ordinates, the accu-
racy of its survey measurements will improve with larger coil separation distances. How-
ever, by installing the coil triads farther apart you might find it difficult to manoeuvre the
ROV.
Large masses of ferromagnetic material can distort the magnetic fields that the 350 System
uses to survey the target. There is usually an abundance of such materials in the ROV body.
You should install the coil array where it is at least 0.5 metres away from the ROV body.
The installation instructions provided in this Manual describe a configuration of the 350
System that combines ease of deployment with optimal performance.
Summary:
The logged data packets include a Quality Control flag to identify data that might show
degraded accuracy. Refer to sub-section 7.3.1 for a description of the Quality Control feature.
Use all the information and facilities available from the 350 System to identify any drop in
System performance so that you may take effective and appropriate corrective action.
7 Operating Procedure
DPN 402197 Issue 2.1 TSS (UK) Limited Page 7-21 of 28
7.5.2 Sources of Error
There are other error sources that might degrade System performance. You should make your-
self aware of these so that you may take action to avoid them or to reduce their effect on sur-
vey results.
These error sources fall within two categories:
ROV handling See sub-section 7.5.2.1.
Electrical interference See sub-section 7.5.2.2.
7.5.2.1 ROV Handling
The following paragraphs describe the potential sources of error that might arise as a result of
unskilled or inappropriate operation of the ROV. These include:
The relative positions of the ROV and the target.
ROV trim and skew.
The position of the altimeter.
ROV Position over the Target
Figure 72 illustrates how errors in the measurement of depth of cover might occur when you
survey a target that is partially buried beneath an uneven seabed.
Note that errors such as these arise from inaccuracies in measurements made by the
altimeter and not to any errors in measuring the vertical range to target.
Figure 72: ROV positioning errors
Flying with no lateral offset
Figure 72(a) shows the best condition achievable when you use a single altimeter: The
ROV is level and is flying with the altimeter located directly over the target.
Under these conditions the depth of cover measurements are accurate.
Flying with Lateral Offset
In Figure 72(b), the lateral offset of the ROV has placed the altimeter to one side of the
target so that it measures its altitude above one of the trench walls. Consequently, the
altimeter delivers information that will not allow accurate assessment of the depth of target
cover.
350 Cable Survey System
Page 7-22 of 28 TSS (UK) Limited Issue 2.1 DPN 402197
It is therefore important to ensure that:
You install the altimeter correctly according to the instructions in sub-section 3.2.3.
You locate the altimeter near the centre of the coil array.
You operate the ROV so that, as far as possible, the target remains positioned centrally
beneath the coil array.
It is important also to recognise that, under the above conditions, these errors affect only the
depth of cover measurements.
Summary:
Install the altimeter correctly at the centre of the coil array.
Pay careful attention to the relative position of the ROV over the target.
Be aware of any errors that may arise from the local seabed topography.
For surveys where the depth-of-cover information is critical, consider using a scanning profiler
to survey the seabed on either side of the target. You may then merge information from the
profiler with measurements from the 350 System during the survey analysis operation.
The effects of roll, pitch and skew
In severe cases of roll such as shown in Figure 73, errors might appear in the vertical range
and lateral offset measurements on the target.
Figure 73: ROV roll errors
Figure 73(a) shows the ideal condition where the ROV is level over the target. In these con-
ditions, the measurements for VRT and LAT will be accurate and valid.
Figure 73(b) shows the same situation, but with 15 roll applied to the ROV. If left uncor-
rected, under these conditions errors will exist in the measurements of both the vertical range
and the lateral offset.
For a target located centrally beneath the coil array as shown, the displayed value for lateral
offset will contain an error as follows:
Error = Z.sin (Roll angle)
Where Z is the vertical distance between the coils and the target.
7 Operating Procedure
DPN 402197 Issue 2.1 TSS (UK) Limited Page 7-23 of 28
For example, measurements on a target located 1.0 metre below the centre of the coil array
will include a lateral offset error of 0.17 metres with 10 of roll applied to the ROV.
Measurements of VRT performed by the 350 System will remain relatively unaffected by
small angles of roll. Under the conditions described in the above example, the vertical meas-
urement will contain an error of only 15mm caused by the ROV attitude.
If left uncorrected, angles of pitch will affect:
The accuracy of the forward range estimate.
The depth-of-cover measurement accuracy.
The accuracy of vertical range measurements might degrade if large angles of skew exist
between the coil array and the target. This is because the effective coil separation distance
decreases as the angle opens.
If there is a slight crosscurrent in the survey area, it may be possible to perform the survey only
with a small angle of skew present. Under these circumstances, the System will continue to
supply valid data with skew angles up to 15. If you know that this condition will prevail in
the survey area, assess the degree of error by conducting dry-land test measurements on a sam-
ple of the target with applied skew.
The Run Window of DeepView displays the measured angle of skew between the ROV and the
target when operating in the 350 mode.
Summary:
Inaccuracies in vertical range measurements made by the System will increase by no more
than 3.5% for roll angles up to 15.
Where possible, operate the ROV throughout a survey with an even trim and with no angle of
skew between the ROV and the target.
Slope
When you use the 350 System to survey a cable that ascends or descends a steep slope, you
should understand how measurements of depth of cover may degrade in accuracy. Figure 74
illustrates this situation.
350 Cable Survey System
Page 7-24 of 28 TSS (UK) Limited Issue 2.1 DPN 402197
Figure 74: Sloping target
In Figure 74 the coil array measures the shortest distance to the target W.
Similarly, the measurements of ALT will be the shortest distance between the altimeter and the
seabed within the beamwidth of the altimeter W.
The depth of cover COV = VRT ALT. However, because the seabed is sloping, the measure-
ments of VRT and ALT are valid for different locations on the seabed. Because of this, errors
will appear in the depth-of-cover measurements. Errors of this type will be larger if the altime-
ter and the coil array are at opposite ends of the ROV.
Since the slope of the seabed will vary unpredictably, there might be some random elements of
error in all these measurements.
Summary:
Be aware of the potential measurement errors that might appear when operating over a sloping
target.
Make certain there is a negligible fore-aft offset distance between the coil array and the trans-
ducer face of the altimeter. Angles of slope less than half the beamwidth of the altimeter will
not affect the measurements in this way.
Reduce the potential errors caused by a sloping seabed by operating the ROV as close as pos-
sible to the seabed.
7 Operating Procedure
DPN 402197 Issue 2.1 TSS (UK) Limited Page 7-25 of 28
7.5.2.2 Electrical Interference
The 350 System is unaffected by the following factors:
Changes of ROV heading
Any local static magnetic field
Acoustic noise
The presence of platforms, rigs or other vessels in the vicinity.
This sub-section describes the sources of interference that might affect the 350 System.
You may estimate the level of background noise by examining the Scope and Spectrum Ana-
lyser window of DeepView. If the noise level is so high so that it masks the tone frequency,
take whatever action you can to reduce or eliminate the noise.
The ROV
Other items of electrical equipment on board the ROV, for example the thrusters, might repre-
sent a powerful source of electrical noise. If these noise components are at a sufficiently high
level, they might mask the relatively weak signals associated with the target tone.
Signal discrimination by the 350 System is extremely good. It removes noise from the calcula-
tion process by examining only a very narrow window of frequencies with the tone at its cen-
tre. However, where noise levels centred on the tone frequency are very high, they might
degrade the performance of the 350 System and affect the accuracy of its survey measure-
ments.
The Scope and Spectrum Analyser window of DeepView will show those bands where noise is
at a minimum. You may then adjust the frequency of the target tone to fall within one of these
quieter bands.
Summary:
Use the SDC display software to check all channels of the 350 System with all electrical
equipment on the ROV operating. Select a tone frequency centred on a part of the band that
has low noise levels.
Investigate any severe noise sources before you start the survey and reduce or eliminate them
if possible.
Use the display software to perform regular checks on the quality of tone signal.
Vibration
Mechanical vibration of the coil triads could create a noise signal at a relatively low level as
the coils move relative to local magnetic fields. This noise would exist across a broad band of
frequencies centred on the frequency of vibration.
Where vibration is fast and severe, the resultant induced signals could interfere with the signal
from the target cable.
350 Cable Survey System
Page 7-26 of 28 TSS (UK) Limited Issue 2.1 DPN 402197
Slow movements, such as those of the ROV manoeuvring, will have a negligible effect since
the resulting induced voltages will be at a frequency below the pass-band of the 350 System.
Summary:
Follow the installation instructions throughout this Manual. Ensure the coil mounting arrange-
ments provide a rigid support that damps vibrations quickly.
Operate the ROV at a speed that avoids the onset of vibration.
Select a tone frequency that does not coincide with the frequency of vibration.
Power-carrying Cables
If you use the 350 System to survey power cables that carry high currents, the coils might
experience saturation. If this occurs, the System will be unable to calculate the position of the
target.
The most effective way to cure this problem is to remove power from the cable or to operate
the ROV at a greater distance from the target.
Impressed-current Cathodic Protection
When surveying near sub-sea pipes or metallic structures that use impressed-current cathodic
protection, the 350 System might suffer from noise pick-up. Provided the tone frequency is
different from that of the cathodic protection the System will be able to discriminate between
the two.
Use the display software to confirm whether such noise breakthrough is occurring.
Summary:
Perform regular checks on signal quality and on the signal-to-noise ratio by using the SDC dis-
play software.
If cathodic protection currents present a problem, arrange to switch off the current while you
perform the target survey. The interference will disappear immediately although the protection
afforded by the current will remain for some time afterwards.
Operating over Ferrous Rock Dumps
Operating the 350 System over a ferrous rock deposit or dump might affect measurements.
This is because the ferrous content of the rock will introduce a random distortion to the mag-
netic fields radiated by the tone-carrying cable.
This distortion varies with the nature of the rock and there is no way to predict the magnitude
of errors introduced.
Summary:
Where possible avoid conducting a survey in areas where the rock formations have a signifi-
cant ferrous content.
Be aware of a possible degradation in measurement accuracy when operating the 350 System
near ferrous rock dumps.
7 Operating Procedure
DPN 402197 Issue 2.1 TSS (UK) Limited Page 7-27 of 28
Earth Return Path
If the tone-carrying cable runs parallel with and close to a good conductor, this arrangement
might introduce a shorter earth return path for the tone current. In very severe cases, the
shorter return path might cause errors to appear in measurements made by the 350 System.
In these conditions, the characteristics of the return path are uncertain, making it impossible to
predict the magnitude of errors.
Summary:
Be aware that errors might exist in data acquired by the 350 System when you operate it over
saturated sand or where a nearby conductive structure, such as a pipeline, runs alongside the
cable.
Curved Target Course
If the target cable has been laid along a course that includes loops or curves as shown in Figure
75, the magnetic fields radiated by the tone will be distorted unpredictably throughout the
affected areas.
Under these conditions, the measurement accuracy of the 350 System will degrade unpredicta-
bly.
Figure 75: Curved target
Summary:
Be aware that errors might exist in data acquired by the 350 System when you use it to survey
targets that do not follow an approximately straight course.
350 Cable Survey System
Page 7-28 of 28 TSS (UK) Limited Issue 2.1 DPN 402197
7.6 ROVS
You may use the 350 System with most types and size of ROV, and you may operate it at
depths down to its maximum specified depth rating. The standard installation described in this
Manual provides a high degree of accuracy and a useful measurement range, together with
ease of deployment.
It is important to install the 350 System properly by following the instructions included
throughout this Manual. The System will supply valid survey data only if you follow these
installation and operating instructions, which allow you to install the System on most types of
ROV.
7.6.1 Speed of Operation
The 350 System delivers measurements to a data logger continuously at a rate that allows
deployment on the faster ROVs. This is sufficient to maintain a high track resolution under all
normal operating conditions.
7.6.2 Altitude above the Seabed
The vertical detection range of the 350 System is limited by the frequency and magnitude of
the target tone.
Where you will use the System to track a weak current at low frequency you should fly the
ROV as near to the seabed as possible, while avoiding damage, so that the coils remain close
to the target. If your ROV has an automatic facility for maintaining altitude, you may use it.
7.6.3 Automatic Steering
You may fit an Analogue Output card to the SDC. This facility supplies an output voltage that
varies in amplitude and polarity with the lateral offset of the target relative to the ROV. You
may use this option to supply a control signal to the automatic steering system of a tracked
ROV.
7.6.4 Tracked ROV
You may install the 350 System on tracked ROVs. This type of ROV should allow you to set a
fixed coil height.
If you mount the System on an ROV of this type, locate the coils approximately one metre
above the seabed.
8 System Specifications
DPN 402197 Issue 2.1 TSS (UK) Limited Page 8-1 of 10
8 SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS
Along with a detailed specification of the 350 System and its major assemblies, this section of
the Manual also includes a chart to show the measurement accuracy that the System can
deliver under ideal operating conditions.
While revising this 350 System Manual, TSS has made every effort to ensure that the
specifications included are correct.
However, in line with the TSS policy of continual product development and improve-
ment, TSS (UK) Limited reserves the right to change equipment specifications without
notice. Refer to TSS for advice if necessary.
8.1 Specifications Page 2
Detailed hardware specifications for the major components of the 350 System.
8.2 Performance Page 5
A graphical illustration of the range performance envelope of the 350 System for one particu-
lar combination of tone frequency and current.
8.3 System Trials Page 6
Details and results of trials conducted using the 350 System to investigate and confirm the
accuracy of measurement.
Page 8
The external and internal logging formats used by the 350 System, and the data formats used
by the compatible types of altimeter.
8.4 Update Rate Page 9
You must take care when you merge data supplied by the 350 System with information from
other sources.
350 Cable Survey System
Page 8-2 of 10 TSS (UK) Limited Issue 2.1 DPN 402197
8.1 SPECIFICATIONS
Where given, UK imperial conversions of dimensions and weights are to two decimal
place accuracy.
8.1.1 Surface Display Computer
SDC-Type 8:
To take advantage of developments in computer technology, TSS (UK) Limited has
updated the design of the SDC since the first introduction of the original 350 Cable Sur-
vey System. The software used by the 350 System is the first in the series to operate in
the Windows 2000 environment, therefore earlier SDCs will not have the capability to
operate this system correctly.
Processor: VIA C3 Samuel 2 733MHz processor running Windows 2000
RAM size: 128 MB PC133 SDRAM
Hard disk size: Minimum 20 GB
CD-ROM: x52 speed
Floppy disk size: 3 DS-HD 1.44 MB
Ports: Five serial RS232
One parallel LPT1
Mono composite video in/out
Colour composite video in/out
S-video in/out
TSS current loop in/out
Optional analogue output
VGA from SDC LDC.
Keyboard: Sealed-membrane keypad + Touch pad.
Monitor: Integral 15 inch flat-panel XGA colour display.
Overall size: 483(w) 354(h) 265(d) mm (excluding transit case)
{19.02 13.94 10.43 inches}
Weight: Circa. 20kg {44 pounds} (excluding transit case)
Weight: Circa. 33kg {73 pounds} (including transit case)
Power input voltage: 85 - 265V (47 to 63Hz) auto-ranging
Power consumption: 250W maximum
Temperature range: (Operating) 0 to 50C {32F to 122F}
Relative humidity: 10% to 95% R.H. non-condensing at 40
o
C
8 System Specifications
DPN 402197 Issue 2.1 TSS (UK) Limited Page 8-3 of 10
Vibration resistance: 5 to 17Hz
2.5mm double amplitude displacement.
17 to 500Hz 1.5g peak-to-peak
Ingress protection: IP60 (Front panel IP65)
350 Cable Survey System
Page 8-4 of 10 TSS (UK) Limited Issue 2.1 DPN 402197
8.1.2 Sub-sea Electronics Pod
SEP-Type 2:
Size: 140 460mm* {5.51 18.11 inches}
Weight: In air 10kg {22.05 pounds}
In water 2kg {4.41 pounds}
Input voltage: 110 to 120V AC 45 to 65Hz
Maximum power demand 3.1A when in a Dualtrack installation
Option 220 to 240V AC 45 to 65Hz
Maximum power demand 1.8A when in a Dualtrack installation
Operating temperature: 0 to 30C {32 to 86F}
Communication: 2-wire 20mA digital current-loop.
4-wire 20mA digital current-loop.
RS232.
Selectable by internal links.
Depth rating: 3000 metres {9843 feet}
Finish: Hard black anodised aluminium
Connections: ROV 3 metres cable length
Umbilical One or two twisted pairs, or multiplexer.
*Allow up to 300mm {11.81 inches} extra for connector clearance.
8.1.3 Search Coil Array
Sensing coil size: 68 340mm each {2.68 13.39 inches}
Quantity: Six sensing coils arranged in two coil triads with polyurethane
alignment and mounting blocks.
Weight: In air 3.5kg {7.72 pounds} per sensing coil
In water 2.4kg {5.29 pounds} per sensing coil
Depth rating: 3000 metres {9843 feet}
Material: Polyurethane
Connection cables: Two required 4 metres long
(8 metre option available).
8 System Specifications
DPN 402197 Issue 2.1 TSS (UK) Limited Page 8-5 of 10
8.2 PERFORMANCE
Figure 81 defines the vertical range measurement accuracy of the 350 System for the stated
conditions of tone current i.e. 30mA at 25Hz.
Figure 81: Vertical range measurement accuracy
350 Cable Survey System
Page 8-6 of 10 TSS (UK) Limited Issue 2.1 DPN 402197
The frequency and amplitude of the tone current may affect the range measurement capability
and noise performance of the 350 System. Changes to the current and frequency will not affect
the accuracy of measurements made by the System.
The range information shown in Figure 81 applies only where the tone current at the point of
measurement is 30mA at a frequency of 25Hz.
8.3 SYSTEM TRIALS
This sub-section includes the practical results obtained using the 350 System at a carefully
established test site. The trials included measurements over a 8 metre lateral offset and a ver-
tical range of 5 metres.
8.3.1 Trials Configuration and Procedure
The test site included the largest cable loop that could be laid in the available area (see Figure
82). Equipment for use in the trials procedure included:
A standard TSS 350 Cable Survey System.
A hydraulic platform to support the coils of the 350 System.
A loop of wire 60 metres in diameter as shown in Figure 82.
A TSS Tone Generator to supply the cable loop with tone current at various amplitudes
and frequencies.
TSS conducted the tests using the central straight run of cable that spanned the diameter of the
loop. This arrangement reduced any effect that the current return path around the outside of
the loop may have had upon readings.
With the hydraulic platform located at the centre of the loop and the coil array positioned cen-
trally over the test cable, the platform could raise and lower the coils to pre-determined
heights. The test procedure also specified the cable movements necessary to simulate various
lateral offsets.
8 System Specifications
DPN 402197 Issue 2.1 TSS (UK) Limited Page 8-7 of 10
Figure 82: Trials site
350 Cable Survey System
Page 8-8 of 10 TSS (UK) Limited Issue 2.1 DPN 402197
8.3.2 Results
8.3.2.1 Accuracy
Tables 81 and 82 below show details of the errors measured in the vertical and lateral off-
sets between the target cable and the centre of the coil array.
Notes:
1. Positive values show that the vertical range or the lateral offset indicated by the 350 Sys-
tem was greater than the distance measured using a tape measure.
2. The response of the 350 System proved to be symmetrical about its central axis. The fol-
lowing tables therefore show only the response to the port side.
3. Lateral offsets, vertical range, and errors are all listed in units of centimetres.
4. o/s signifies that the 350 System switched to one-sided calculations to indicate which
side the cable lay but not its offset distance.
Tables 81 and 82 indicate the measurement accuracy that you may achieve using the
350 System under ideal conditions. These tables are for general information only you
should not use them to correct measurements you have already taken.
Table 81: Vertical measurement errors
Vertical
range
Lateral offset
-800 -600 -400 -300 -250 -220 -200 -180 -160 -140 -120 -100 -80 -60 -40 -20 0
500 -129 -95 -58 -27 -27 -28 -26 -22 -15 -14 -10 -10 -9 -7 -6 -2 -1
400 -89 -74 -37 -12 -12 -11 -9 -6 -4 -4 -2 -4 -5 -4 0 3 5
350 -72 -64 -34 -11 -11 -7 -3 -2 -1 1 2 2 1 3 4 7 8
300 -48 -44 -24 -7 -5 -2 0 2 1 2 3 2 2 1 5 8 11
250 -19 -34 -22 -7 -4 -3 -1 0 1 2 4 3 4 4 4 4 6
200 -29 -27 -16 -4 -2 1 2 3 1 4 5 4 2 1 2 1 7
180 o/s o/s -15 -4 -2 -1 1 2 3 5 5 5 3 2 -1 2 6
160 o/s -10 -14 -3 -2 0 2 2 2 2 3 4 3 2 0 4 6
140 o/s o/s -9 -2 0 2 3 3 3 5 6 6 5 3 0 2 4
120 o/s o/s -4 -1 1 3 4 4 5 4 3 4 4 4 2 4 4
100 o/s o/s 1 1 0 1 2 3 3 4 6 4 3 1 0 2 1
8 System Specifications
DPN 402197 Issue 2.1 TSS (UK) Limited Page 8-9 of 10
8.4 UPDATE RATE
You may set the rate at which the 350 System supplies measurements to an external data log-
ger to either one or four records per second.
Update rates available from independent seabed profiling Systems may be different from the
update rate you have set for the 350 System. If your ROV includes both these systems, you
must allow for their different update rates when you analyse the survey data.
Table 82: Lateral measurement errors
Vertical
range
Lateral offset
-800 -600 -400 -300 -250 -220 -200 -180 -160 -140 -120 -100 -80 -60 -40 -20
0
500 -48 -1 13 12 18 12 8 9 10 5 3 3 3 1 -1 -5

400 -9 -3 19 13 16 12 8 1 12 4 5 4 5 1 -2 -5

350 9 14 14 13 15 12 8 9 11 4 5 4 5 1 -2 -5

300 45 28 18 15 15 12 8 9 9 4 4 4 4 1 -3 -6

250 146 46 17 15 14 14 8 9 9 4 4 4 4 2 -3 -6

200 239 60 22 18 16 14 10 10 9 3 4 4 3 1 -4 -6

180 o/s o/s 24 18 16 14 11 10 10 3 4 5 3 0 -4 -6

160 o/s 149 32 23 18 15 12 11 11 4 5 5 2 0 -5 -7

140 o/s o/s 35 23 12 16 15 11 12 4 5 5 2 -1 -5 -7

120 o/s o/s 58 26 25 16 17 11 14 5 7 5 2 -1 -5 -8

100 o/s o/s 81 36 29 17 19 12 16 5 8 5 2 -2 -7 -8

350 Cable Survey System

Page 8-10 of 10 TSS (UK) Limited Issue 2.1 DPN 402197
9 Maintenance
DPN 402197 Issue 2.1 TSS (UK) Limited Page 9-1 of 26
9 MAINTENANCE
You will find it easier to identify and clear a fault on the 350 System if you have a full under-
standing of the location of the individual sub-assemblies, and of the way they interact. This
section helps you to maintain and service the System by describing the main internal compo-
nents of the sub-sea installation.
WARNING
ELECTRICAL HAZARD
Mains power supply voltages can cause death or serious injury by electric shock.
Only a competent engineer who has received the relevant training and experience
should perform maintenance work on electrical equipment.
Power-off and isolate the equipment from the electrical supply before you work on any
equipment that uses a mains power supply. Arrange to discharge any power supply
storage capacitors safely.
Observe all relevant local and national safety regulations while you perform any main-
tenance work on electrically powered equipment.
Do not connect the equipment to an electrical supply until you have refitted all safety
covers and ground connections.
9.1 Circuit Description Page 2
The simple descriptions of circuit boards in the SEP assist you in the identification of a poten-
tial fault. Refer to the circuit diagrams in section 10 while you read the descriptions.
9.2 Disassembly and Reassembly Page 9
To maintain the depth rating of the sub-sea installation, follow these instructions carefully to
disassemble and reassemble the SEP.
9.3 Fault Identification Page 18
These flow charts should help engineers to identify and correct a fault condition on the SEP
quickly and efficiently. The standard System includes a field support kit with replacement cir-
cuit boards and components to help reduce downtime if a fault develops.
350 Cable Survey System
Page 9-2 of 26 TSS (UK) Limited Issue 2.1 DPN 402197
9.1 CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
The sub-sea installation consists of two principal parts:
The array of sensing coils
The Sub-sea Electronics Pod (SEP).
Additionally, the sub-sea installation might include an altimeter.
Figure 91 shows how these are interconnected.
Figure 91: Simplified interconnection diagram Sub-sea installation
section 10 includes the electrical drawings for the System.
9 Maintenance
DPN 402197 Issue 2.1 TSS (UK) Limited Page 9-3 of 26
9.1.1 Sensing Coils
See drawing number 401105 in sub-section 10
The coil array includes six identical and electrically independent sensing coils, each of which
includes an internal pre-amplifier board. Drawing number 401105 shows the pre-amplifier
board for a single coil. The pre-amplifier board receives power through the coil connection
cable.
CAUTION
Any water entering the coil housing will cause permanent damage to the coil winding
and to the pre-amplifier board.
TSS matches and calibrates the pre-amplifier boards carefully to their specific coil
windings during manufacture. You must not remove these items from the coil hous-
ings, which contain no user-serviceable parts.
To avoid damage to the coils, do not remove the brass end-caps from the coil hous-
ings. You will invalidate the warranty if you open a coil housing for any reason.
Connection between the coil winding and the input to the pre-amplifier is through a 2-pin
Molex connector PL1. Signals from the coil windings arrive at the input to a low-noise buffer
amplifier U1 that provides two functions:
Four different gain settings. TSS establishes these settings during manufacture by setting
link LK1.
Low-pass filtering with a cut-off frequency of 300Hz.
The diode assemblies D1 and D4 provide input protection. The buffered signals from the coils
then arrive at a band-pass filter formed by U2 and U3 to improve noise attenuation. This filter
arrangement has a pass band from 7.2Hz to 318Hz.
U4 and U6 provide low noise programmable amplification with absolute gain settings of 1,
2, 4, or 8 according to the control voltages on pins 1 and 2 of the coil connector PL2.
The output from the amplifier U4 splits, with one half inverted by U5, to provide a differential
signal output on pins 3 and 4 of PL2. This differential signal passes through a twisted pair in
the coil connection cable to the SEP input.
Power supplies for the pre-amplifier board enter through PL2 pin 5 (+12V) and pin 6 (12V),
with the ground connection on pin 7.
350 Cable Survey System
Page 9-4 of 26 TSS (UK) Limited Issue 2.1 DPN 402197
9.1.2 Sub-sea Electronics Pod
The SEP provides all the power supply, signal processing and communication functions for the
sub-sea installation of the 350 System.
9.1.2.1 Analogue-to-Digital Converter
See drawing number 401104 in sub-section 10.
Differential analogue signals from the port coil triad arrive at the input to the SEP on PL2 pins
3/4 (lateral), pins 5/6 (fore-aft) and pins 7/8 (vertical).
Similarly, the differential analogue signals from the starboard coil triad arrive at the input to
the SEP on PL3 pins 3/4 (lateral), pins 5/6 (fore-aft) and pins 7/8 (vertical).
The connectors PL2 and PL3 also carry the +12V and 12V supplies, used by the pre-ampli-
fier boards, on pins 9 and 10 respectively.
The SEP uses three separate dual-channel ADCs to perform the analogue-to-digital conver-
sions. This process happens simultaneously on all six input channels. Each of the ADCs is
identical drawing 401104-2 shows a single dual-channel arrangement for the starboard lat-
eral and vertical coils. Drawings 401104-3 and 401104-4 show the port lateral and vertical coil
ADC, and the port/starboard fore-aft coil ADC respectively.
For simplicity, the following description includes only the two ADC channels shown in draw-
ing 401104-2. The description is also valid for the other channels:
U2/U3 and U4/U5 buffer the differential input signals from each coil before they pass to their
appropriate differential input channels of the ADC U1. Except for the application of some
low-pass anti-aliasing filtering, no signal processing occurs before the ADC.
The diode array D1D8 provides protection for both differential ADC input channels.
The ADC device U1 is an 18-bit dual-channel converter that must receive low-noise signals
and power supplies. The ADC has separate analogue and digital grounds to support this
requirement.
In drawing 401104-2, Region 1a is the low-noise analogue section of the ADC board with all
its power supply lines filtered and conditioned. Additionally, the digital signals that pass
between the ADC board and the Processor Board are opto-isolated to reduce noise conduction.
The serial output from the ADC, which appears at pin 15 of U1, is a multiplexed combination
of the two input channels. Pin 13 of U1 supplies a gate-control signal to identify which of the
two input channels is currently being transmitted.
Pin 16 of U1 provides a frame-sync signal to identify the start and end of each 18-bit ADC
output sequence.
Opto-isolators U10 and U11 protect the serial data, gate-control, and frame-sync outputs
before they pass through a ribbon cable to the Processor Board.
9 Maintenance
DPN 402197 Issue 2.1 TSS (UK) Limited Page 9-5 of 26
Opto-isolated digital inputs to the ADC are:
Analogue and digital power-down APD/DPD (through U12) to control the ADC mode of
operation. The ADC Board uses these for its self-calibration during initialisation.
The clock signal from the Processor Board (through U13).
Pre-amp gain control (through U14) to set the absolute gain of the pre-amplifier using U6
of the Coil Pre-amplifier Board (see drawing 401105).
9.1.2.2 Processor Board
See drawing 401103 in section 10.
The Processor Board consists of three sub-sections:
The ADC Interface (drawing 401103-4)
The Processor Core (drawing 401103-2)
The communications interface (drawing 401103-3)
1. ADC Interface (see drawing 401103-4).
The ADC Interface takes the three serial data lines from the ADC Board and multiplexes them
onto one processor bus.
The three serial data inputs SD1, SD2 and SD3 arrive at the ADC Interface through pins
3, 7 and 11 respectively of PL5. SD1 contains the starboard lateral and vertical channels,
SD2 contains the port lateral and vertical channels and SD3 contains both fore-aft chan-
nels. The gate-control and frame-sync signals for each channel arrive at pins 4/6, 8/10 and 12/
14 of PL5.
The ADC Interface uses three separate and identical channels to process all three serial data
inputs simultaneously. For each channel, the serial data that originates from one coil passes
into serial-to-parallel buffers under the control of the frame-sync and clock signals.
When these buffers are loaded fully with data, an interrupt signal causes the processor to read
each parallel port U53U55 in turn. The processor knows which of the two coils in each chan-
nel is being read, by the state of the gate-control signal that is included as bit number 18 of the
parallel output.
Once the processor has read the output buffers, data from the other coil in each channel passes
into the buffers to be read by the processor.
Since all three channels on the ADC Interface run from the same clock, they will remain syn-
chronised perfectly and will always maintain the correct timing relationships.
350 Cable Survey System
Page 9-6 of 26 TSS (UK) Limited Issue 2.1 DPN 402197
2. Processor Core (see drawing 401103-2).
Data from the ADC Interface arrives at the Digital Signal Processor (DSP) U1.
The DSP operates with four parallel bytes of zero wait state SRAM forming 32-bit words. It
reads its program from EPROM U12 at power-on and copies it into RAM for execution in a
manner similar to a PC booting from a disk.
Byte-wide E
2
PROM U11 provides non-volatile parameter storage, and PLD U5 implements
primary decoding.
SCC devices U17 and U18 handle communications to and from the SEP: U17 handles com-
munications with the SDC and the direct communications from the sub-sea altimeter. This ver-
sion of the SEP does not use U18.
Buffer U57 provides the gain control signals for the pre-amplifiers and the ADC control sig-
nals APD, DPD and CMODE.
3. Communications Interface (see drawing 401103-3).
U19 and U20 opto-isolate the current-loop signals that pass between the SEP and the SDC.
U22, U23, U24 and U25 respectively control the RS232, 2-wire and 4-wire current-loop com-
munications. The settings of links LK1 to LK5 select among four options (see sub-section
4.2.2.1 for instructions to change the communications method). Note that the current version
of SDC does not support the fourth method, RS422 communications.
Opto-isolators U28 and U29, and ICs U31 and U32 support direct communications to the SEP
from an altimeter.
9 Maintenance
DPN 402197 Issue 2.1 TSS (UK) Limited Page 9-7 of 26
9.1.2.3 Power Supply
Power for the sub-sea components of the 350 System comes from the ROV electrical distribu-
tion system. The standard configuration for the sub-sea 350 System accepts an electrical sup-
ply in the range 110 to 120V at 45 to 65Hz. An alternative SEP is available from TSS for use
with installations that must operate from an electrical supply in the range 220 to 240V.
WARNING
Do not attempt to modify the SEP to use an incorrect electrical supply. A label on the
SEP identifies the correct SEP operating voltage.
The power supply circuit provides conditioned and stabilised voltages of +24V, +15V, 15V
and +5V to drive all the components of the sub-sea installation (the SEP, the coil pre-amplifi-
ers and an altimeter connected to the SEP).
Cooling of the supply is by direct thermal conduction to the SEP housing assisted by a small
fan.
WARNING
There is a danger of electric shock from mains voltages on the Power Supply board.
Do not open the SEP with power connected. Except for the fuse on its input, the Power
Supply board is NOT field repairable. You must renew the Power Supply board as a
complete unit if you suspect it has developed a fault.
9.1.3 Current Loop
When you configure the System to use the 2-wire current-loop communications method, the
SEP and the SDC share a twisted pair in the umbilical. To avoid possible contention, the 350
System assigns Master status to the SDC, and Slave status to the SEP.
Immediately after you power-on the 350 System, the SEP transmits a short banner message
to the SDC and then waits for commands to arrive. Other than its initial banner message, the
SEP will not transmit data until it receives a carriage-return signal from the SDC.
The SEP Processor Board generates current at 20mA for the communication loop. The
COMMS LED on the SDC is in series with the current-loop and therefore confirms that the
communication loop is intact when it shows red. Note that the COMMS LED does NOT con-
firm successful communication between the SEP and SDC, but shows only that the loop is
intact.
Figure 92 shows a simplified schematic of the current-loop, including the optically isolated I/
O ports at both ends of the umbilical cable.
350 Cable Survey System
Page 9-8 of 26 TSS (UK) Limited Issue 2.1 DPN 402197
Figure 92: Simplified schematic of the current-loop
9 Maintenance
DPN 402197 Issue 2.1 TSS (UK) Limited Page 9-9 of 26
9.2 DISASSEMBLY AND REASSEMBLY
WARNING
ELECTRICAL HAZARD
Mains power supply voltages can cause death or serious injury by electric shock.
Only a competent engineer who has received the relevant training and experience
should perform maintenance work on electrical equipment.
Power-off and isolate the equipment from the electrical supply before you work on any
equipment that uses a mains power supply. Arrange to discharge any power supply
storage capacitors safely.
Observe all relevant local and national safety regulations while you perform any main-
tenance work on electrically powered equipment.
Do not connect the equipment to an electrical supply until you have refitted all safety
covers and ground connections.
9.2.1 Surface Display Computer
CAUTION
Many components within the SDC are susceptible to damage due to electrostatic dis-
charge. You must take precautions against such damage: These precautions include
the use of a grounded conductive mat and wrist-strap. TSS (UK) Limited will not accept
responsibility for any damage caused by failure to take such precautionary measures.
The following instructions are valid for the SDC Type 8 that the 350 Cable Survey Sys-
tem is shipped with. The 350 System will not work with earlier versions of our SDCs
due to this being the first system to operate under the Windows
TM
environment. Con-
tact TSS (UK) Limited for advice if necessary.
You will need to disassemble the SDC if you must change the communication link settings or
if you must change one of the TSS (UK) Limited circuit boards. To remove an expansion card:
1. Power-off the SDC and disconnect all power and communication cables.
2. Remove the SDC from its mounting. If you have installed your SDC inside its transit case,
detach the front access panel from the case. Remove the eight chrome-plated cross-head
screws and plastic washers that secure the SDC to the support frame. Lift the SDC from
the transit case and place it on a clear level surface. Figure 93 shows the SDC transit case
with front and rear access panels. Take precautions to prevent the SDC sliding and falling
with movements of the vessel.
Care must be taken to protect the display panel and the keypads of the SDC.
350 Cable Survey System
Page 9-10 of 26 TSS (UK) Limited Issue 2.1 DPN 402197
Figure 93: SDC transit case
3. Unscrew the two knurled retaining bolts on the rear fold down panel of the SDC and lower
the panel.
4. Inside the SDC, remove the mid card rail and the rear connector panel by removing the
retaining screws and any washers at the base of the mid card rail and on the left hand side
of the rear connector panel, and un-clipping the rail at the top. Retain the screws and wash-
ers for re-fitting the mid card rail and the rear connector panel.
5. Remove and retain the side connector panel cover screws, and remove the side connector
panel cover.
6. Unscrew and remove any connectors to the expansion card on the side connector panel.
Disconnect any internal connections to the expansion card making a note of the connec-
tions removed.
Figure 94: Rear access panels of the SDC
Front of
SDC
Front access
panel
Rear access
panel
BACK PANEL REMOVED BACK PANEL IN PLACE
OUT IN OUT IN
COLOUR CV MONO CV S-VIDEO
OUT IN
COMMS FROM POD RS232 TO COM1
PRINTER COM1
ALTIMETER LOG O/P GPS
COLOUR CV MONO CV
OUT IN OUT IN IN OUT
S-VIDEO
COMMS FROM POD RS232 TO COM1
PRINTER COM1
GPS LOG O/P ALTIMETER
ANALOGUE O/P
SDC 8 SDC 8
VGA ANALOGUE O/P VGA
REAR CONNECTOR PANEL MID CARD PANEL
9 Maintenance
DPN 402197 Issue 2.1 TSS (UK) Limited Page 9-11 of 26
7. Identify the relevant expansion card in the backplane. Release and remove the screw and
any washers that secure its bracket to the mounting bar. Retain the screws and any washers
for later use.
8. Pull the card carefully from the backplane socket. Avoid damaging or bending any compo-
nents on the card during this procedure.
Figure 95: Side access panel of the SDC
To insert an expansion card:
9. Carefully align the card and insert its edge connector into the relevant backplane socket.
Taking care to avoid any component damage, press the card fully home. Refit the retained
screw and any washers, and secure the card bracket to the mounting bar.
10. Reconnect any internal connections to the expansion card according to the notes made in
instruction 6. Reconnect and screw lock any connections to the expansion card on the side
connector panel.
11. Replace the side connector panel cover and refit with the retained screws.
12. Make certain that there are no trapped wires or cables and refit the mid rail and rear con-
necter panel using the retained screws and any washers. Lift the rear fold down panel back
into place and tighten up the knurled retaining bolts.
Re-install the SDC and re-connect all cables. If you install the SDC in its transit case, pass all
cables through the rear of the case.
9.2.2 Sub-sea Electronics Pod
CAUTION
Many components within the SEP are susceptible to damage due to electrostatic dis-
charge. You must take precautions against such damage: These precautions include
the use of a grounded conductive mat and wrist-strap. TSS will not accept responsibil-
ity for any damage caused by failure to take such precautionary measures.
A
A
A
A
VIEW WITH SIDE PANEL
REMOVED
VGA LCD MOUSE
COM5
USB
VGA 1
COM4
COM2
COM3
VGA 2
LPT1
COM1 MOUSE/KEYB
ANALOGUE OUTPUTS
RS232 TO COM1
VIDEO IN/OUT
COMMS FROM POD
RS232 VGA
VIEW WITH SIDE PANEL
IN PLACE
350 Cable Survey System
Page 9-12 of 26 TSS (UK) Limited Issue 2.1 DPN 402197
To disassemble and reassemble the SEP you will need the following tools and facilities:
A clean anti-static work area
A 3mm hexagonal key
A 2.5mm hexagonal key
Remove the Power/Comms end-cap:
1. Use the 3mm hexagonal key to release and remove the four M4 12mm A4 stainless-steel
screws that secure the end-cap to the housing.
2. Use the 2.5mm hexagonal key to remove the two button head screws from their threaded
holes near the edge of the end-cap.
3. Insert two of the M4 12mm screws into the holes vacated by the button head screws and
tighten them by hand until you feel resistance.
4. Use the 3mm hexagonal key to tighten the two M4 12mm screws alternately so that they
lift the end-cap away from the SEP housing.
5. After you have screwed the two jacking screws home, use your fingers to ease the end-cap
away from the SEP housing. Note that a partial vacuum may form inside the housing and
this may make it difficult to remove the end-cap. Do not insert any hard or sharp instru-
ments into the gap to act as a lever because this may scratch the surface, following
which corrosion will occur.
6. Remove the two jacking screws from the end-cap.
7. Do not allow strain to develop on the internal connectors as you ease the end-cap away
from the SEP housing. Disconnect the 8-way and the 6-way internal connectors by press-
ing their two side-clips together and pulling the plugs and sockets apart.
8. Disconnect the ground strap by pulling the spade connector and receptacle apart.
Remove the coil connector end-cap:
9. Remove the four M4 12mm A4 stainless-steel screws as before. Substitute two of these
screws in place of the two button head screws to jack the end-cap away from the SEP hous-
ing. Remove the jacking screws from the end-cap.
10. Remove the end-cap carefully note that it carries all the circuit board assemblies. Handle
this assembly with care. Pull the end-cap carefully until the entire assembly is free of the
SEP housing and place it on the clean anti-static work surface. Save the pack of desiccant
that is wedged underneath the circuit-board assembly and store it in a warm dry place
while you work on the circuitry.
11. The Processor Board is located on one side of the central support block, and the ADC and
the Power Supply boards are located together on the other side.
9 Maintenance
DPN 402197 Issue 2.1 TSS (UK) Limited Page 9-13 of 26
To remove and reinstall any of the boards perform the following:
Processor Board (see Figure 96):
IMPORTANT NOTE
The Processor Board holds calibration data for the ADC Board. Therefore, you must
renew the Processor Board and the ADC Board together if you suspect either is faulty.
You will degrade System performance if you do not follow this advice.
1. Unclip and release the 4-way Primary Comms connector PL2. Unclip and release the 8-
way connector PL1. Unclip and release the 34-way connector PL5.
2. Use a 3mm hexagonal key to release and remove the eight M4 14mm stainless steel
screws that secure the board to the support block and remove the Processor Board.
3. Refit the board by reversing the above procedure.
Figure 96: Processor Board layout
PL2
Primary Comms
PL3
Altimeter
PL4
R/P Sensor
PL1
PL5
TP4
U12
D1
LK1
LK2
LK3
LK4
LK5
D2
U13
U5
ADC Interface
COMMS
U38
U37
U36
U10
U9
U8
U7
U45
U44
U43
U50
U49
U48
U55
U54
U53
SL
SV
SD1 SD2 SD3
PL
PV
PF/A
SF/A
P
a
r
a
l
l
e
l
O
/
P
p
o
r
t
s
DSP
EPROM
U11
E PROM
NVM
2
U17
SDC
Alt
U18
R/P Sens
Processor Board
350 Cable Survey System
Page 9-14 of 26 TSS (UK) Limited Issue 2.1 DPN 402197
ADC Board (see Figure 97):
IMPORTANT NOTE
The Processor Board holds calibration data for the ADC Board. Therefore, you must
renew the Processor Board and the ADC Board together if you suspect either is faulty.
You will degrade System performance if you do not follow this advice.
1. Unclip and release the 34-way connector PL1. Unclip and release the two 11-way connec-
tors PL2 and PL3.
2. Use the 3mm hexagonal key to release the four M4 12mm screws that secure the ADC
Board to the support block. Remove the ADC Board.
3. Refit the board by reversing the above procedure.
Figure 97: ADC Board layout
PL1
PL2
PL3
ADC Board
SD1
SL SV
U1
SD2
PL PV
U20
SD3
PF/A SF/A
U30
18-bit dual channel ADC
9 Maintenance
DPN 402197 Issue 2.1 TSS (UK) Limited Page 9-15 of 26
Power Supply Board (see Figure 98):
1. Release and remove the insulating cover that protects the Power Supply board. Unclip and
release the 10-way connector. Unclip and release the 5-way connector that is near the 2A
fuse.
2. Use the 3mm hexagonal key to release the four M4 12mm screws that secure the Power
Supply board to the support block. Remove the Power Supply board. Retain the four insu-
lated spacers and all insulated inserts.
3. Check the 20mm 2A fastblow fuse on the Power Supply board and fit a new one if it has
failed. Investigate the cause of any repeated fuse failure.
4. Refit the board by reversing the above procedure. Make certain that you refit all the insu-
lated spacers and inserts when you reassemble the Power Supply board to the support
block. Refit the insulating cover over the Power Supply board.
Figure 98: Power Supply Board layout
CAUTION
Do not attempt to modify the Power Supply board so that it operates from an incorrect
electrical supply.
Reassemble the SEP:
1. Check the condition of the two rubber O-rings that seal each of the end-caps. Clean or
renew them if necessary. Apply a thin smear of approved lubricant to the rings to ensure
they make an efficient seal when you reassemble the SEP. For this purpose, use the same
type of lubricant that you use for the sub-sea electrical connectors refer to sub-sec-
tion 4.1.2 for these important instructions.
2. Orientate the circuit board assemblies on the support block:
Place the empty SEP housing left-to-right in front of you. Make certain that the short
grounding lead inside the SEP housing is towards the right-hand end of the housing. You
must insert the coil connector end-cap into the housing from the opposite end to the
grounding lead.
Align the end-cap and the electronics assembly so that the two external connectors are hor-
izontal and the Processor Board faces towards you (see Figure 99).
350 Cable Survey System
Page 9-16 of 26 TSS (UK) Limited Issue 2.1 DPN 402197
Figure 99: Orientation of the coil connector end-cap
3. Place the desiccant pack inside so that it fits between the Processor Board and the SEP
housing. Make certain that there are no trapped wires or components and push the end-cap
home.
4. Carefully align the end-cap to the SEP housing so that the four securing screws will
engage properly. If necessary, turn the end-cap slightly to achieve perfect alignment.
Ensure that the two holes for the button head screws align with the hardened stainless steel
inserts on the end of the SEP housing.
5. Insert the four M4 12mm A4 stainless steel screws and use the 3mm hexagonal key to
tighten them evenly. Insert both button head screws and tighten them lightly.
6. Reconnect the ground wire, the 8-way and the 6-way connectors on the Power/Comms
end-cap. Make certain both locking clips on each of the connectors engage properly.
7. Align and engage the Power/Comms end-cap into the SEP housing. Make certain both
holes for the button head screws align with the hardened stainless steel inserts in the end of
the SEP housing.
8. Make certain there are no trapped wires and press the end-cap home. Twist the end-cap
slightly if necessary to achieve perfect alignment of the screw holes. As you replace the
end-cap, the SEP housing may become slightly pressurised which may make the cap diffi-
cult to replace. Do not apply excessive force.
9. Insert the four M4 12mm A4 stainless steel screws and use the 3mm hexagonal key to
tighten them evenly. Insert both button head screws and tighten them lightly.
9 Maintenance
DPN 402197 Issue 2.1 TSS (UK) Limited Page 9-17 of 26
9.2.3 Coil Cable Continuity
Table 91 lists the pin-to-pin connections in the coil cables. You may use this information to
test the continuity of the cable during maintenance work.
The two cables are identical. Although you may interchange the coils, you must couple the
vertical, lateral and fore-aft coils to their correct 8-way connectors on the cable. Labels iden-
tify the cable tails.
Table 91: Connections to the coil cable
Sensing coil 8-way connector SEP 12-way connector
Description Pin No Pin No Description
G0 Pre-amp gain control line 1 1 G0 Pre-amp gain control line
G1 Pre-amp gain control line 2 2 G1 Pre-amp gain control line
Signal + (Lateral) 3 3 Lateral coil signal +
Signal (Lateral) 4 4 Lateral coil signal
Signal + (Fore-aft) 3 5 Fore-aft coil signal +
Signal (Fore-aft) 4 6 Fore-aft coil signal
Signal + (Vertical) 3 7 Vertical coil signal +
Signal (Vertical) 4 8 Vertical coil signal
+12V supply in 5 9 +12V supply out
12V supply in 6 10 12V supply out
Analogue ground 7 11 Analogue ground
12 Screen chassis
350 Cable Survey System
Page 9-18 of 26 TSS (UK) Limited Issue 2.1 DPN 402197
9.3 FAULT IDENTIFICATION
The remainder of this section includes advice and a series of flow charts to help you locate a
fault in the sub-sea components of the 350 System.
TSS has gathered considerable experience with the 350 System in many survey opera-
tions and under a variety of conditions, and has used this experience to compose the
following flow charts.
If your System fails, perform the following checks before you call TSS engineers for
assistance.
1. Check that you have installed the 350 System correctly according to the instructions in
Sections 3 and 4.
2. Check that the configuration of the 350 System is correct. Refer to sub-section 6.2.2 for
details of the System Parameters dialog.
3. Check that you have connected all cables correctly.
4. Check that the correct electrical supplies are available to the SDC and the SEP.
5. Identify the fault symptoms as clearly as possible, and apply the appropriate fault identifi-
cation routine from the following list:
Fault on a single channel only see sub-section 9.3.1.
Communications failure see sub-section 9.3.2.
Poor tracking performance see sub-section 9.3.3.
Altimeter failure see sub-section 9.3.4.
9 Maintenance
DPN 402197 Issue 2.1 TSS (UK) Limited Page 9-19 of 26
9.3.1 Fault on a Single Channel
Figure 910: Single channel failure
Power-off the System
Swap the coil cable
on the faulty side.
Swap the coil on the
faulty channel
Is the
channel
working?
Yes
No
No
Yes
Is the
channel
working?
Enter new calibration
details into SDC.
See sub-section 6.2.2.
Is the
wiring
good?
Is the
channel
working?
Contact TSS for advice
No
Yes
No
Yes
Single channel fault
Check connections and
wiring to the ADC Board
Disassemble the SEP.
See sub-section 9.2.2
Resume the survey
Renew the faulty
coil cable
Renew the faulty coil.
See sub-section 3.3.2.
Repair or renew the
connector wiring.
Renew the ADC Board
350 Cable Survey System
Page 9-20 of 26 TSS (UK) Limited Issue 2.1 DPN 402197
9.3.2 Communications Failure
Figure 911: Communications failure CHART 1
Communication
failure
Is SDC
COMMS
LED on?
Power-off the System.
Disconnect the SEP
Power/Comms cable
Continuity check the
cable and umbilical
Comms
OK?
LED or wiring failure.
Repair as necessary
Power-on the System
110V
20%
OK?
Check the mains
power supply source
Power-off the System
Reconnect the SEP
Power/Comms cable
Go to CHART 2
Use terminal mode to
check SEP comms.
Yes
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
See sub-section 6.2.1.4
for terminal mode
Connect AC voltmeter
across pins 1 & 3
Look for 240V instead
if your SEP operates
from a 240V supply
9 Maintenance
DPN 402197 Issue 2.1 TSS (UK) Limited Page 9-21 of 26
Figure 912: Communications failure CHART 2
From CHART 1
Disassemble the SEP
Check and repair any
obvious damage
Check all five links on
SEP Processor Board
Set all links correctly
Go to CHART 3
Check continuity
of SEP connectors
Is
wiring
OK?
Check correct COMMS
method installed in SDC
COMMS
method
OK?
Install correct method
Are
SEP links
set OK?
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
Repair/renew
connector wiring
350 Cable Survey System
Page 9-22 of 26 TSS (UK) Limited Issue 2.1 DPN 402197
Figure 913: Communications failure CHART 3
From CHART 2
Reconnect 12-way and
6-way connectors
Comms
method?
Short pins 1 & 2 on
Processor Board PL2
Short pins 3 & 4 on
Processor Board PL2
COMMS
OK?
Power-on the System
Check supply LEDs on
Power Supply Board
All
LEDs
on?
Check wiring and
supply voltages
Check internal wiring
to all boards
Is
wiring
OK?
Repair as necessary
Disconnect PL2
on Processor Board
LEDs
D1 D3 D4
on?
Check cable continuity Change Processor PCB
Reassemble the SEP
Contact TSS for advice
No
Yes
No
Yes
2-wire
current-loop
4-wire
current-loop
Yes LEDs
D1 D4
on?
Yes No
No
Yes
No
Renew faulty board
9 Maintenance
DPN 402197 Issue 2.1 TSS (UK) Limited Page 9-23 of 26
9.3.3 Poor Tracking Performance
Figure 914: Poor tracking performance
All
coils
OK?
Coil
connections
OK?
Connect coils
correctly
Is
tone
noisy?
Use a different
tone frequency
System
setup
OK?
Reconfigure System
correctly
Coil
separation
>1.4m?
Increase coil
separation
Contact TSS for advice
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
Poor tracking
performance
See sub-section 9.3.1
350 Cable Survey System
Page 9-24 of 26 TSS (UK) Limited Issue 2.1 DPN 402197
9.3.4 Altimeter Failure
These flow charts should help you to identify a fault with the TSS or the Datasonics altimeter
connected directly to the SEP. Refer to the altimeter manual for further assistance if necessary.
If a fault develops when you use an alternative altimeter connected to the SDC COM2 port,
check it using the terminal mode and check the data strings against those listed in sub-section
7.3.3. Refer to sub-section 6.2.1.4 for details of the terminal mode.
If there are no data strings from the altimeter, check the RS232 parameters and the wiring.
Refer to the altimeter manual for specific servicing details.
Figure 915: Altimeter failure CHART 1
Altimeter failure
Select terminal mode
icon from toolbar
Ensure "350SEP" selected
Screen
updates
OK?
Clear COMMS problem
Select Altimeter config,
then press altimeter test.
Data
OK from
altimeter?
Comms from altimeter
are good
Press OK to end test
Is
altimeter
updating?
Altimeter is good
Refer altimeter manual
Contact TSS for advice Go to CHART 2
Check correct altimeter
type is selected
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
9 Maintenance
DPN 402197 Issue 2.1 TSS (UK) Limited Page 9-25 of 26
Figure 916: Altimeter failure CHART 2
From CHART 1
Power-off the System
Disconnect cable from
altimeter
Continuity check
altimeter cable
Is
wiring
OK?
Connect a 470 ohm
1 watt resistor between
pins 1 and 3 of the SEP
altimeter port.
18V
2V
OK?
Refer altimeter manual
Disassemble the SEP
Check wiring to end-cap
Contact TSS for advice
Is
wiring
OK?
No
Yes
Remove the four screws
in the altimeter end-cap
Yes
No
Yes
No
Renew altimeter cable
Set DC voltmeter to
pins 1 (+) and 3 (-) of
SEP altimeter port
Repair/renew wiring
Renew the SEP
Processor Board
350 Cable Survey System
Page 9-26 of 26 TSS (UK) Limited Issue 2.1 DPN 402197
10 System Drawings
DPN 402197 Issue 2.1 TSS UK Limited Page 1 of 2
10 SYSTEM DRAWINGS
* Stainless Steel Drawing Numbers included in this table for information only. For details and
specification see the corresponding Standard Product Drawing Number.
REFERENCE DRAWINGS
Drawing Number Description
Stainless Steel
Drawing Number*
Electrical Drawings
490234 Sub-sea Electronics Pod Overall diagram
401105 Coil pre-amplifier
4011041 Analogue to Digital conversion
4011042 Analogue to Digital conversion ADC 1
4011043 Analogue to Digital conversion ADC 2
4011044 Analogue to Digital conversion ADC 3
4011031 Processor Board
4011032 Processor Board CPU Core
4011033 Processor Board Comms
4011034 Processor Board ADC Interface
Mechanical Drawings
490221 350CE Cable Survey System Assembly (110v).
This drawing also applicable to Part Number 490222 (240v) Assembly
490223 (110v)
490224 (240v)
601008 350CE 3-axis coil cable assembly
601108 ROV Tail Assembly 4.0m standard
Standard Product
Drawing Number
Description Reason for inclusion
601103 1 ROV Tail Assembly 3.0m standard This Drawing illustrates cable supplied prior
to January 2001. A significant change to
the connection type required superseding to
Cable Part Number 601104 - 1 for standard
issue.
601104-1 ROV Tail Assembly 4.0m standard This Drawing illustrates cable supplied
between January 2001 and January 2002. A
significant change to the connection type
required superseding to Cable Part Number
601108 - 1 for standard issue.
350D Cable Survey System
Page 2 of 2 TSS UK Limited Issue 2.1 DPN 402197
A Operating Theory
DPN 402197 Issue 2.1 TSS (UK) Limited Page A-1 of 10
A OPERATING THEORY
The 350 System locates a target by:
1. Detecting the alternating magnetic fields associated with tone currents injected onto the
cable.
2. Isolating the tone frequency from background noise.
3. Calculating the position of the target cable from the relative strengths of the signals on
each channel.
This appendix describes these processes.
A.1 Electromagnetic Fields Page 2
Magnetic fields surround any current-carrying conductor. These must be alternating fields pro-
duced by a tone current so that the 350 System can detect them.
A.2 Field Detection Page 2
The System uses an array of sensitive coils on the ROV to detect the alternating magnetic
fields from the target cable.
A.3 Signal Isolation Page 3
The 350 System receives signals across a wide band of frequencies. These include noise
together with the desired tone frequency. The System uses powerful signal processing tech-
niques to reduce or eliminate background noise.
A.4 Calculation Page 4
Combinations of signals on the six channels allow the 350 System to deliver measurements of
target co-ordinates, forward search range, and the angle of skew.
350 Cable Survey System
Page A-2 of 10 TSS (UK) Limited Issue 2.1 DPN 402197
A.1 ELECTROMAGNETIC FIELDS
The 350 System uses an array of sensing coils to detect the presence of alternating magnetic
fields and applies complex and powerful signal-processing techniques to locate the origin of
these magnetic fields.
Alternating magnetic fields exist around any conductor that carries an alternating current and
are of a strength that varies directly with the instantaneous magnitude of the current.
Figure A1: Lines of magnetic flux
Figure A1 shows the situation when a conductor carries a current. In this example, the con-
ductor appears in cross-section with conventional current flow rising upwards out of the page.
As the current begins to flow, lines of magnetic flux expand concentrically from the centre of
the conductor with their polarity in an anti-clockwise direction as shown. The strength of the
flux varies inversely with distance from the conductor.
When the amplitude of current varies, the flux lines will expand or collapse simultaneously.
The flux lines will reverse polarity when the current changes direction.
A.2 FIELD DETECTION
Each sensing coil of the 350 System consists of a very large number of turns of fine copper
wire wound around a ferrous metal core. The continuously changing magnetic fields that exist
around a tone-carrying conductor act upon the sensing coils and induce in them an alternating
voltage v. This voltage varies in magnitude according to the following relationships:
Where d = distance from the conductor to the sensing coil
f = frequency of current in the conductor
i = magnitude of current in the conductor
v
1
d
--- v f v i
A Operating Theory
DPN 402197 Issue 2.1 TSS (UK) Limited Page A-3 of 10
A.3 SIGNAL ISOLATION
Marine survey environments suffer from significant levels of background noise produced by
other electrical systems on board the ROV. The 350 System must remove this noise from the
coil signals before it can perform meaningful calculations.
This noise reduction process involves many stages, including:
1. BAND-PASS FILTERING:
Signals received by the coils may be extremely weak possibly less than 5V in amplitude.
Each of the six windings in the coil array therefore includes a precision pre-amplifier and filter
board to apply amplification and signal conditioning before it transmits the signals to the rela-
tively noisy environment on board the ROV. The pre-amplifier can vary its overall gain auto-
matically according to circumstances.
An additional function of the pre-amplifier board is to apply high-pass and low-pass filtering.
This function limits the pass-band of signals that arrive at the SEP to between 7.2Hz and
300Hz.
2. Frequency spectrum analysis
The SEP converts the analogue signals supplied by the coils to an 18-bit digital format for
processing by the digital signal processor (DSP). Figure A2 shows a simplified block dia-
gram of the signal path for three of the six channels in the 350 System.
Figure A2: Simplified signal path
The SEP samples the supplied signals approximately 1000 times per second and uses powerful
signal processing techniques to determine the spectrum of received frequencies.
After processing the signals in this way, the SEP divides the entire received spectrum into nar-
row windows as shown in Figure A3. The System stores the instantaneous signal amplitude
for each of these windows in a series of memory locations.
350 Cable Survey System
Page A-4 of 10 TSS (UK) Limited Issue 2.1 DPN 402197
Figure A3: Frequency windows
This process isolates the various frequency components in a signal very effectively so that the
System can distinguish the tone frequency easily from among the background noise. The SDC
display software provides a Frequency Spectrum feature similar to Figure A3, with the tone
frequency identified as a solid red bar. The example in Figure A3 shows the tone frequency
at 33Hz.
See sub-section 6.2.1.4 for a more detailed description of the complete Frequency Spectrum
display.
A.4 CALCULATION
By using an array of two coil triads, the 350 System avoids potential sources of measurement
error caused by changes in the amplitude of the tone signal. Calculations performed by the 350
System provide three modes of operation:
1. Survey mode:
The SDC displays the vertical range to target and the lateral offset of the target relative to
the centre of the coil array. If the System receives altitude information or you have speci-
fied a fixed coil height, this mode can also supply measurements of altitude and target
depth of cover.
See sub-section 6.2.1.2 for a full description of the Run Display screen.
2. Forward Search mode:
The SDC can display an estimate of the range to a tone-carrying cable that lies along an
intersecting course ahead of the ROV. This facility allows you to use the 350 System to
conduct a search for a target in the survey area.
See sub-section 6.2.1.3 for a full description of the Forward Search screen.
3. Skew Measurement mode:
The SDC displays and transmits the angle of skew measured between the track of the tar-
get and the ROV heading. Ideally, there should be no angle of skew present during a sur-
vey.
The SDC displays all measurements relative to the ROV. They might therefore contain errors if
you operate the ROV with some angle of roll or pitch.
0 10 20 100
Frequency (Hz)
90 80 70 60 50 40 30
R
e
l
a
t
i
v
e
a
m
p
l
i
t
u
d
e
A Operating Theory
DPN 402197 Issue 2.1 TSS (UK) Limited Page A-5 of 10
You may pass measurements made using any available mode to an external data logger for
subsequent analysis.
See Sections 5 and 6 for a description of the SDC software. Refer to Section 7 for instructions
to use the 350 System during a survey.
A.4.1 Survey Mode
To measure the target co-ordinates (vertical range and lateral offset), the 350 System uses sig-
nals from only the vertical and the lateral sensing coils in each coil triad.
Given a known frequency and magnitude of current in the conductor, the amplitude of signal
voltage delivered by each coil winding will depend upon the relative angle between the coil
and the conductor.
Figure A4: The effect of incident angle on coil response
Figure A4 shows the cross-section of a conductor carrying an alternating current that has a
constant peak amplitude and frequency.
Figure A5: Coil response as incident angle varies
350 Cable Survey System
Page A-6 of 10 TSS (UK) Limited Issue 2.1 DPN 402197
Figure A5 shows the relationship that exists between the signal voltage v received by the coil
in Figure A4 and the angle between the coil and the conductor:
There will be no output (a null condition) when the conductor lies along the major axis of
the sensing coil ( = 90 or = 270).
There will be maximum output when the conductor is on a line perpendicular to the major
axis ( = 0 or = 180).
In all other conditions the coil output will be at some intermediate value between maxi-
mum and zero as defined in Figure A5.
The 350 System uses two coils arranged at right angles to extend the coverage through a full
360. By comparing the relative outputs from the two coils, the System can determine the
angle between the centre of the coil pair and the target as shown in Figure A6.
Figure A6: Determination of relative angle using two coil voltages
In Figure A6 the two independent windings of the coil assembly supply signal voltages v
x

(lateral coil) and v
z
(vertical coil). The System uses these to derive the angle between the coil
assembly and the conductor:
Since TSS calibrates and matches the coil windings during manufacture, any changes to the
tone frequency or current will have an equal effect on all coils. The ratio of their output volt-
ages (and therefore the evaluation of ) will therefore remain constant.
v cos
tan
v
x
v
z
---- =
A Operating Theory
DPN 402197 Issue 2.1 TSS (UK) Limited Page A-7 of 10
Figure A7: Target location using two coil pairs
The 350 System uses an array of two coil pairs to determine the position of the target cable.
Figure A7 shows this situation.
The SEP measures the strength of signals simultaneously on each of the four channels v
x1
/v
z1

and v
x2
/v
z2
and determines the target location by triangulation. The SEP extracts the co-ordi-
nates for lateral offset and vertical range, and transmits these through the umbilical to the
SDC.
A.4.2 Forward Search Mode
If the 350 System receives input from an altimeter, it can use this information to estimate the
range to a tone-carrying cable that lies along an intersecting course ahead of the ROV.
You may find this facility useful if you are searching for a target in the survey area. You may
use the display to steer the ROV towards the expected position of the target at a near-perpen-
dicular angle and then switch to the run mode to steer a course along the target.
Figure A8: Forward Range Calculation
When operating in the Forward Search mode, the 350 System uses signals from the vertical
and the fore-aft coils.
Signals from the relevant coil pair allow the 350 System to determine the search angle to the
target cable in the same way as described in sub-section A.4.1 above. The System then uses
this information, together with the measured altitude of the ROV, to estimate the forward
range:
350 Cable Survey System
Page A-8 of 10 TSS (UK) Limited Issue 2.1 DPN 402197
It is important to note that this range is an estimate only. Factors that affect the accuracy of this
estimate are:
The flatness of the seabed topography.
The calculation assumes that the height of the coils relative to the target cable is the same
as the altitude measured by the altimeter. Errors caused by uneven seabed topography are
likely to be larger at greater forward ranges. The accuracy of the estimate will degrade fur-
ther with a target buried beneath the seabed.
Operating the ROV with pitch.
Any angle of pitch will affect the forward search angle directly. The magnitude of errors
caused by angles of pitch increases rapidly with forward range.
A.4.3 Skew Measurement
The Run Display screen includes a graphical element that shows the angle of skew between
the ROV and the target cable (see sub-section 6.2.1.2 for further details of this display fea-
ture). The System uses the lateral and the fore-aft coils on one side of the array to measure
skew.
Figure A9 shows a survey ROV above the target cable. A small angle of skew exists between
the target and the ROV.
The 350 System measures the target co-ordinates as explained in sub-section A.4.1 above.
These measurements retain the specified accuracy for that part of the target directly between
the two coil triads.
Figure A9: Vehicle following target with skew angle
The example of Fig A10 shows the target with a skew angle
and the output voltages from the lateral coil (v
x
) and the fore-aft
coil (v
y
) in the port coil triad.
Signal voltages supplied by the coil will be at a maximum with
the major axis of the coil perpendicular to the target. A coil
lying parallel to the course of the target will give a very weak
output. The peak amplitude of output voltage will vary with the
sine of the relative angle between the major axis of the coil and
the target cable.
Forward range
Altitude
tan
-------------------
A Operating Theory
DPN 402197 Issue 2.1 TSS (UK) Limited Page A-9 of 10
Figure A10: Skew angle measurement
Because of this relationship, the System can determine the
angle of skew :
The skew measurement method described does not require you
to locate the coil triad directly over the target cable. It can work
to the specified accuracy over a considerable swath range.
The convention used by the 350 System is to define positive
skew with the ROV rotated clockwise relative to the target.
The SDC displays measurements of skew only with the System
operating in the Survey mode.

v
y
v
x
---- atan =
350 Cable Survey System
Page A-10 of 10 TSS (UK) Limited Issue 2.1 DPN 402197
B Options
DPN 402197 Issue 2.1 VT TSS Limited Page B-1 of 16
B OPTIONS
The description throughout the main part of this Manual relates to the standard 350 Cable Sur-
vey System. Such a System provides all the facilities you will need to survey a target lying on
or buried beneath the seabed.
For some applications, the 350 System may be more effective if you specify it with one or
more of the available options.
This appendix describes the options that TSS can supply for use with the 350 Cable Survey
System:
Analogue output feature
Combined Dualtrack installation with a TSS 350 System
Engineer training
B.1 Analogue Output Page 2
An analogue output option is available for use with ROVs that have an automatic steering
facility.
B.2 Dualtrack System Page 6
To provide a survey system that has greater flexibility, the 350 System can be connected to a
TSS 440 Pipe and Cable Survey System. Combined operation of the two Systems extends the
range of applications for which either System can be used.
B.3 Training Page 15
TSS offers comprehensive operator and engineer training for the 350 Cable Survey System.
350 Cable Survey System
Page B-2 of 16 VT TSS Limited Issue 2.1 DPN 402197
B.1 ANALOGUE OUTPUT
The Analogue Output option allows the 350 System to produce an analogue output voltage
that varies in amplitude and polarity with the lateral offset of the target. You may use the ana-
logue signals from the SDC as the input to an automatic steering control system on a tracked
ROV.
The option comprises the following items:
An analogue output card installed inside the SDC.
An internal cable to take the analogue output to the rear connector panel
An output connector and cable. One end of the cable has open tails to allow connection to
the ROV control system.
B.1.1 Analogue Output Specification
User programmable scaling with a default value of 1V/m.
User programmable trim configuration, in metres. The SDC adds this automatically to the
lateral offset of the target before it applies scaling.
User programmable polarity a positive output voltage may represent either port or star-
board steering as required.
The analogue output updates five times per second.
Analogue resolution of 5mV from a 12-bit DAC.
The System can suppress analogue output channel A automatically if it receives bad data.
If configured in this way, on receipt of bad data, output A will be zero whatever the trim
setting.
A second analogue output channel B is available. It is identical to output A except that
on receipt of bad data, it is not set to zero and continues to provide an analogue output
voltage.
An auxiliary two-state output is available, which indicates whether the received data is
good (+5V) or bad (0V).
The trimmable analogue output voltage range is 10V maximum, with the capacity to
deliver up to 10mA.
B Options
DPN 402197 Issue 2.1 VT TSS Limited Page B-3 of 16
B.1.2 Analogue Output Installation
WARNING
ELECTRICAL HAZARD
Mains power supply voltages can cause death or serious injury by electric shock.
Only a competent engineer who has received the relevant training and experience
should perform maintenance work on electrical equipment.
Power-off and isolate the equipment from the electrical supply before you work on any
equipment that uses a mains power supply. Arrange to discharge any power supply
storage capacitors safely.
Observe all relevant local and national safety regulations while you perform any main-
tenance work on electrically powered equipment.
Do not connect the equipment to an electrical supply until you have refitted all safety
covers and ground connections.
You should use the spare ISA backplane socket between the Converter Card and the single
board computer to fit the analogue output card inside the SDC. Follow the instructions in sub-
section 9.2.1 to open the SDC and remove the relevant blanking bracket.
Follow the instructions in sub-section 9.2.1 to insert the Analogue O/P Card.
Install the internal cable as follows:
Feed the internal cable through the side panel cable cut out. Attach slide lock 50-way con-
necter to the analogue output card. Fix the 50 way convertor on the other end of the cable
to the rear connector panel using the supplied screw lock posts.
The output from the analogue card is through a 50-way female D-type port. Refer to Table B
1 and make connections from the Analogue Output port to the steering control system.
Table B1: Analogue output port details
Function 50-way D-type port pin designation Wire colour
Analogue output A 15 Red
Analogue output B 32 Blue
Output common 14 Green
Good/bad data flag 48 Yellow
Screen (SDC ground) 1
350 Cable Survey System
Page B-4 of 16 VT TSS Limited Issue 2.1 DPN 402197
B.1.3 DeepView for Windows Operation
DeepView for Windows will detect whether your SDC has the analogue output card fitted. If
the card is present, the Configuration Menu will include an Analogue Output item that
allows you to configure the analogue output. See sub-section for a description of the Installa-
tion Menu. The following sub-sections describe the analogue parameters that you may modify.
The SDC saves their status with the configuration file
B.1.3.1 Analogue Scaling
Set the analogue scaling in volts per metre. The default value is 1V/m.
You may use any positive floating-point value the software will reject any negative numbers.
B.1.3.2 Analogue Trim
This value should be the lateral offset distance in metres between the centre line of the coil
array and the centre line of the ROV. It allows the analogue output function to operate cor-
rectly if you have installed the coils so they are offset to one side of the ROV centre line.
You may use any floating-point number or polarity to configure the System. Use a positive
value when the centre of the coil array is to starboard of the ROV centre line.
B.1.3.3 Analogue Polarity
Use the radio button keys to select polarity, defined as follows:
B.1.3.4 Analogue Output
Use the Analogue Output icon (see section 6.2.3) to toggle between ON and OFF. This func-
tion enables and disables the analogue outputs respectively.
Positive polarity Lateral offset positive = Target to Starboard = Output voltage positive
Negative polarity Lateral offset positive = Target to Starboard= Output voltage negative
B Options
DPN 402197 Issue 2.1 VT TSS Limited Page B-5 of 16
B.1.4 Output Voltages
All outputs are trimmable, factory set to 0.2% 20mV.
Output A is active whenever:
Outputs are enabled
Signals are not in saturation
The target is in range and the 350 System can determine an accurate target position.
Output B is active whenever:
Outputs are enabled
Signals are not in saturation
The target is in range but the 350 System cannot determine an accurate target position.
The Good Data Flag is set (+5V) whenever:
Outputs are enabled
Signals are not in saturation
The target is in range and the 350 System can determine an accurate target position.
The Good Data set output = +5V
Otherwise Good Data = 0V
350 Cable Survey System
Page B-6 of 16 VT TSS Limited Issue 2.1 DPN 402197
B.2 DUALTRACK SYSTEM
CAUTION
You might cause permanent damage to the sub-sea installations of the 440 or the 350
System if you operate them from an incorrect electrical supply voltage.
The standard sub-sea components of both Systems operate from a nominal 110V AC
electrical supply. Both Systems are available with the option to operate from a nominal
240V AC electrical supply. When you interconnect the 440 and the 350 Systems within a
Dualtrack installation you must operate both from the same electrical supply.
Throughout this sub-section, the 440 Manual refers to the TSS 440 Pipe and Cable Survey
System Manual (TSS document P/N 402196 check).
This part of Appendix B describes the features of a TSS Dualtrack System that combines the
440 and the 350 Survey Systems on board an ROV. It includes all information specific to a
Dualtrack installation and provides cross references that help you locate more detailed infor-
mation in the relevant product Manual.
You must consider the Manuals for the TSS 440 and the 350 Systems valid in all
respects except for those areas listed in sub-section B.2.2 below. TSS recommends
that all personnel who will install, use and maintain the equipment should read and
thoroughly understand the 350 System Manual and the 440 Manual.
B.2.1 The Equipment
The Dualtrack equipment described in this sub-section consists of the following:
Sub-sea components of a TSS 350 Cable Survey System.
Sub-sea components of a TSS 440 Pipe and Cable Survey System.
A single SDC to provide configuration, control and communications functions for both
sets of sub-sea components.
Product Manuals, interconnection cables and mounting components for all three sub-sea
electronics pods.
The 350 requires to have the latest firmware (version 3.7 or later) EPROM. This can be
confirmed in the terminal mode of DeepView for Windows, when the System is initiated
a banner is displayed that will identify the version number.
TSS supplies the System with Microsoft Windows 2000 and the DeepView for Windows
graphical display software already installed and configured to run automatically when you
power-on the SDC. DeepView for Windows can operate in all modes necessary to use the
Dualtrack System.
The sub-sea components and the SDC supplied with the Dualtrack System are exactly as
described in the relevant parts of the 350 System Manual and the 440 Manual, except for those
differences listed in sub-section B.2.2 below.
B Options
DPN 402197 Issue 2.1 VT TSS Limited Page B-7 of 16
B.2.2 The Differences
Note the following important issues when you install the Dualtrack System:
1 Scope of Delivery
Sub-section B.2.3 lists the standard items supplied with the Dualtrack System.
2 Physical installation
Refer to sub-section 3.2 of this Manual for instructions to install the sub-sea components of
the TSS 350 System.
Refer to Section 3 of the 440 Manual for instructions to install the sub-sea components of the
440 System.
You must take special precautions regarding the placement of the search coils when you install
the Dualtrack System on board an ROV.
Sub-section B.2.4 describes the special precautions you must make when you install the Dual-
track System.
3 Electrical connection
To make the most efficient use of the ROV umbilical, the Dualtrack System uses only two
wires for all communications between the surface and the sub-sea installations. See sub-sec-
tion B.2.5 for details of the special electrical connection requirements necessary to support
this communication arrangement.
Where necessary, you may use 4-wire or RS232 communications instead.
Note that, in a Dualtrack System, you must connect the altimeter only to the ALTIMETER port
of the 440 SEP, or to an SDC serial port. Do not connect the altimeter to the 350 SEP.
4 Operation
In a Dualtrack installation, you cannot operate the 440 and the 350 Systems simultane-
ously.
DeepView for Windows allows you to switch between the 440 and the 350 operating mode
easily and quickly. The Run Window and its status bar will show the current operating mode.
5 Power requirement
Sub-section B.2.6 includes details of the power supply requirements for the sub-sea compo-
nents of the Dualtrack System.
350 Cable Survey System
Page B-8 of 16 VT TSS Limited Issue 2.1 DPN 402197
B.2.3 Scope of Delivery
Dualtrack includes the following major sub-assemblies:
Figure B1: Surface Display Computer
Figure B2: Sub-sea components of the TSS 350 System
B Options
DPN 402197 Issue 2.1 VT TSS Limited Page B-9 of 16
Figure B3: Sub-sea components of the TSS 440 System
Table B2: Components of the Dualtrack System
Item Description
Refer to Figure B1:

Surface Display Computer (SDC) pre-loaded with Microsoft Windows 2000 and the DeepView for Windows
display software.
W
1- includes Integral alphanumeric and Function keypad.
2 - integral LCD operational keys such as LCD on/off, Exit, Up, Down, Menu, etc. and also a Power light for the
LCD
W
Fold-down access panel hiding the Power switch, CD-ROM and the 3-inch floppy disk drive, external key-
board connection and USB port, LEDs for POWER (motherboard), HDD and C/LOOP.
W
Integral trackpad.
Refer to Figure B2:

Sub-sea Electronics Pod (350 SEP) for the TSS 350 Cable Survey System.

Two connection cables with waterproof connectors for the port and the starboard coil triads.
W
Port and starboard coil triads.
W
TSS 440-to-350 link cable (TSS P/N 601814). The cable is 2.5 metres long and has waterproof connectors at
both ends.
Refer to Figure B3:

Sub-sea Power Supply Pod (440 PSU) for the 350 Cable Survey System.

Sub-sea Electronics Pod (440 SEP) for the 350 Cable Survey System.

Coil array comprising three TSS search-coils.

Three connection cables with waterproof connectors for the array of search-coils.

Sub-sea altimeter with connection cable and waterproof connector. This altimeter provides information for use
by the entire Dualtrack System.
350 Cable Survey System
Page B-10 of 16 VT TSS Limited Issue 2.1 DPN 402197
Also included with the Dualtrack System but not shown are:
Trackball for use with the SDC and the DeepView for Windows software.
TSS 350 Cable Survey System Manual TSS P/N 402196 current issue.
TSS 440 Cable Survey System Manual TSS P/N 402197 current issue.
Mounting components for the coil triads of the 350 System (see Section 3.2.2 of this Man-
ual for details).
Mounting components for the search coils of the 440 System (see Section 3 of the 440
Manual for details).
Mounting components for all three electronics housings of the Dualtrack System.
B.2.4 Physical Installation
B.2.4.1 Search-coils
Follow the instructions in sub-section 3.2.2 of this Manual to install the mounting bar and coil
triads of the 350 System.
Follow the instructions included in sub-section 3.2.2 of the 440 Manual to install the mounting
frame and the coil array of the TSS 440 System.
CAUTION
With drive current applied to the coils of the 440 System, large induced voltages can
appear across the coils of the 350 System. Later versions of the 350 search coils,
stamped with the letters DT on the end cap, include diodes to protect them from dam-
age caused by these induced voltages.
If your System includes coils that have no diode protection, you should ensure that
there is a clearance of more than 0.75 metres between the coils of the 350 System and
the coils of the 440 System. Contact TSS for advice if necessary.
B.2.4.2 Sub-sea Pods
The Dualtrack System includes three sub-sea pods:
The PSU for the 440 System.
The SEP for the 440 System.
The SEP for the 350 System.
Follow the instructions in section 3.2 of the 440 Manual to install the 440 SEP and 440 PSU.
Follow the instructions included in sub-section 3.2.1 of this Manual to install the 350 SEP.
B Options
DPN 402197 Issue 2.1 VT TSS Limited Page B-11 of 16
B.2.5 Electrical Connection
It is very important that you should interconnect the sub-sea components exactly as described
in Figure B4 and the instructions below.
IMPORTANT
If the Dualtrack System is an upgrade to an existing 440 System, you must open the
440 SEP and set it to use RS232 communications. Refer to sub-section 4.2.2.1 of the
440 Manual for instructions to change the communication method used by the 440 SEP.
Figure B4: Electrical interconnection of sub-sea components
CAUTION
To avoid damage to either of the SEPs, make certain that you fit the blanking plugs sup-
plied by TSS to any unused ports.
Failure to take this precaution might allow water to penetrate the SEP housings, follow-
ing which total circuit failure will occur.
350 Sub-sea Components
440 Sub-sea Components
Power / Comms
cable
440-to-350 Link Cable
Length 2.5m
TSS P/N 601814
POWER / COMMS
connector
AUX OUTPUT
connector
Sub-sea altimeter
must be connected to the
Altimeter port of the 440 SEP
350 Cable Survey System
Page B-12 of 16 VT TSS Limited Issue 2.1 DPN 402197
Connect the TSS 440 sub-sea components:
1. Complete the physical installation of the 440 search-coils as described in sub-section 3.2.2
of the 440 Manual. Route the coil connection cables to the correct ports on the 440 SEP.
Use plastic cable clips to secure the cables to the fixed framework of the ROV.
2. Install the altimeter near the centre of the 440 search-coil array as described in sub-section
3.2.3 of this Manual. Route the cable from the altimeter to the 440 SEP and follow the
instructions in sub-section 4.1.5.1 of this Manual to connect it. Use plastic cable clips to
secure the cable to the ROV frame.
IMPORTANT
The Dualtrack System uses one altimeter only. You must connect the altimeter to the
ALTIMETER port on the 440 SEP, or to an SDC serial port.
If you connect the altimeter to the ALTIMETER port of the 350 SEP the Dualtrack Sys-
tem will not operate correctly.
3. Connect the 440 SEP to its PSU as described in its Manual.
Connect the TSS 350 sub-sea components:
4. Complete the physical installation of the 350 coil triads as described in sub-section 3.2.2
of the 350 Manual. Route the coil connection cables to the correct ports on the 350 SEP.
Use plastic cable clips to secure the cables to the ROV framework.
5. Connect the 350 SEP to the ROV electrical supply by following the instructions in sub-
section 4.2.1 of this Manual.
CAUTION
You might cause permanent damage to the sub-sea installations of the 440 or the 350
System if you operate them from an incorrect electrical supply.
The standard sub-sea components of both Systems operate from a nominal 110V AC
electrical supply. Optionally, both Systems are available for operation from a nominal
240V AC electrical supply.
When you interconnect the 350 and the 350 Systems within a Dualtrack installation,
you must operate both Systems from the same electrical supply.
6. Connect the communications conductors of the 350 Power/Comms cable to the ROV
umbilical. Note that the Dualtrack System would normally use 2-wire current-loop com-
munications to the SDC to reduce the demand for twisted pairs in the umbilical. However,
where necessary, you may use 4-wire or RS232 communications instead. Refer to Tables
44, 45 and 46 in this Manual for appropriate connection details.
B Options
DPN 402197 Issue 2.1 VT TSS Limited Page B-13 of 16
Connect the 350 System to the 440 System:
7. Use the 440-to-350 Link Cable (TSS P/N 601814) to connect the 8-way Power/Comms
connector on the 440 PSU to the AUX OUTPUT port on the 350 SEP. This link uses
RS232 communications at 9600 baud.
Note that the connectors at each end of the cable are of a different design. You cannot
reverse the cable when you make this connection.
Refer to sub-section 4.1.2 in this Manual for instructions to care for and assemble the sub-
sea connectors. Make all interconnections between the sub-sea assemblies and tighten the
locking collars by hand. Do not over tighten the sub-sea connectors.
Connect the SDC to the umbilical cable:
8. Refer either to sub-section 4.2.2 of this Manual or to the 440 Manual for instructions to
complete the connection using the selected communication method.
B.2.5.1 System Configuration
The DeepView for Windows software allows you to configure and control both Systems in a
Dualtrack installation.
If you are installing Dualtrack operation as an upgrade to an existing 440 or 350 Sys-
tem:
Ensure your SDC is capable of running Microsoft Windows 2000 and the DeepView for
Windows software. Contact TSS for advice if necessary.
In a Dualtrack System, the 440 SEP must communicate using RS232. If your 440 SEP
uses 2-wire or 4-wire communications, refer to sub-section 4.2.2.1 of this Manual and
set RS232 communications before you install the SEP on the ROV.
Follow the instructions in sub-section 5.1 of this Manual to install the software onto
your SDC.
To configure the Dualtrack System properly you must complete the following actions.
1. Use the DeepView for Windows System Configuration Wizard to configure the 440 and
the 350 Systems correctly. Select Dualtrack for the SEP type. Refer to sub-section 6.2.2 of
this Manual for instructions to configure the 350 System. Refer to the 440 Manual for
instructions to configure that System.
IMPORTANT
You must select Dualtrack as the SEP type even if you intend to use only one of the
Systems during the survey.
2. Take care to enter all details completely and correctly. Set appropriate altimeter offsets for
the 440 and the 350 Systems.
350 Cable Survey System
Page B-14 of 16 VT TSS Limited Issue 2.1 DPN 402197
B.2.5.2 System Operation
When supplied as part of a complete Dualtrack System the SDC will have all the software nec-
essary to operate already installed and tested. After power-on the SDC will perform an initial-
isation sequence and DeepView for Windows will then start automatically.
Contact TSS for advice if you wish to upgrade an existing 440 or 350 System to a Dualtrack.
1. Refer to this Manual and the 440 Manual for instructions to use DeepView for Windows in
its 440 and 350 modes.
2. Use the selection buttons on the DeepView for Windows tool bar to select
either the 440 or the 350 operating mode. These buttons are available for
use only if you select Dualtrack as the SEP type in the System Configura-
tion Wizard. The buttons are mutually exclusive you cannot operate the
installation with the 440 System and the 350 System operating simultaneously.
3. DeepView for Windows annotates the internal logging file with the operating mode so that
it can replay the file correctly.
Note that the external logging file changes its format when you switch between the 440
and the 350 mode. Be aware that this might cause problems with the data logger and its
software.
B.2.6 Power Supply Requirement
CAUTION
You might cause permanent damage to the sub-sea installations of the 440 or the 350
System if you operate them from an incorrect electrical supply.
The standard sub-sea components of both Systems operate from a nominal 110V AC
electrical supply. Optionally, both Systems are available for operation from a nominal
240V AC electrical supply.
When you interconnect the 440 and the 350 Systems within a Dualtrack installation,
you must operate both Systems from the same electrical supply.
Specifications for the Dualtrack System are as listed in Section 8.1 of the relevant Manual for
the 440 and 350 Systems.
Note that the sub-sea components of the Dualtrack System must operate from the same nomi-
nal supply voltage (either 110V or 240V AC as appropriate).
The maximum current consumption for the Dualtrack System is 3.1A at 110V AC nominal
electrical supply or 1.8A at 240V AC nominal electrical supply.
B Options
DPN 402197 Issue 2.1 VT TSS Limited Page B-15 of 16
B.3 TRAINING
The TSS 350 Cable Survey System is a precision front line survey tool. To exploit the full
potential of the System, all personnel involved with a survey that uses the 350 System from
the initial planning stages to final data presentation should possess a sound understanding of
the performance of the System and its application.
To support this recommendation, TSS has developed two levels of training course to provide
for the needs of those who will be involved with a survey that uses the 350 System. For effi-
ciency, TSS limits the maximum number of participants for each course to four.
On successful completion of the training course, the participants will be asked to complete a
written test. Provided they demonstrate an acceptable level of understanding at this test, they
will receive a numbered Training Certificate.
B.3.1 Part 1: Foundation Course
The Foundation Course meets the needs of all personnel who will be involved with the 350
System, such as Survey Managers, Operation Managers, ROV Managers, Surveyors, Party
Chiefs, Data Processors and Clients Representatives.
Participants will receive comprehensive course notes. The course duration is approximately
four hours and covers the following:
System overview
Principles of operation
Initial installation
Software overview and interfacing with other equipment
Operational considerations and limitations
Practical demonstration
On completion of the Foundation Course, participants will have gained an understanding of
the operating theory of the 350 System. They will also be aware of the considerations neces-
sary at the pre-survey, operations, data acquisition and data processing phases of a survey that
uses the 350 System.
350 Cable Survey System
Page B-16 of 16 VT TSS Limited Issue 2.1 DPN 402197
B.3.2 Part 2: Operators and Engineers Course
This course is a continuation of the Foundation Course and provides for operators and engi-
neers who use the 350 System during a survey, for example ROV Supervisors, ROV Pilots and
Offshore Technicians.
The course duration is approximately two hours and covers the following:
Use of the System as part of a Dualtrack installation
Pod disassembly and reassembly
Circuit board functions
Signal analysis within the SEP
Advanced fault finding
Regular maintenance procedures
System test procedures
Participants in this part of the training course should possess a basic understanding of elec-
tronics.
On completion of this part of the training course, participants should have gained a good
understanding of the hardware and circuit functions of the 350 System. To demonstrate that
they have understood the technical training, there will be an opportunity for course partici-
pants to find realistic sample faults introduced by the engineer who is running the course.
C Cables and Tones
DPN 402197 Issue 2.1 TSS (UK) Limited Page C-1 of 4
C CABLES AND TONES
The target cable must carry a suitable tone signal before the 350 System can detect it. This
tone signal should have the following characteristics:
It should be easy for the 350 System to identify it among other signals that the target cable
or other cables in the survey area might be carrying.
It should have a frequency within a quiet part of the pass band of the 350 System.
The tone current should be of sufficient amplitude to provide a signal that is above the
background noise level.
The 350 System can survey cables of any length. You may improve the effectiveness of the
System if you select a suitable tone frequency and current for the specific cable. This appendix
offers some basic advice on a method for injecting a tone onto a target cable so that you may
use the 350 System to perform the survey.
TSS can supply a tone generator for use with the 350 System. Refer to TSS for advice if nec-
essary.
350 Cable Survey System
Page C-2 of 4 TSS (UK) Limited Issue 2.1 DPN 402197
C.1 TONE INJECTION
The TSS 350 Cable Survey System is an active cable location system that detects the magnetic
fields associated with a tone carried on the cable.
To perform a survey on a cable, the 350 System can use any tone frequency up to a maximum
of 200Hz. In theory therefore, the System could be used to survey a live power cable because
of the mains frequency tone that it carries. In practice however this may not be possible or
desirable for the following reasons:
The tone must be single-phase.
There may be many local sources of interference at the same frequency.
By injecting a tone onto a cable, you may select a frequency in the range 10Hz to 200Hz that is
relatively free from interference. Refer to sub-section 6.2.2 for instructions to change the
detection frequency of the 350 System.
C.1.1 Frequency Selection
Selection of a suitable tone frequency and current will depend upon specific circumstances.
Note the following guidelines:
Generally, a low frequency is better for long cable runs and a high frequency is better for short
cable runs.
To avoid strong interference affecting the survey, the 350 System provides some advanced sig-
nal monitoring facilities. These allow you to examine the spectrum and to set a tone frequency
in a region of relatively low background noise.
C.1.2 Connection to the cable
Throughout the length of the cable, the tone-carrying conductor must be insulated from sea
water. Where applicable, provide a good ground connection at the end of the cable farthest
from the current source.
C.1.2.1 Short cables
For short cables (of less than approximately 100km, depending upon the capacitance of the
cable) you will need access to both ends of the cable:
Table C1: Effects of tone frequency choice
Advantage Disadvantage
Increased tone
frequency
Increased detection ranges available from the
350 System.
Decreased transmission distance for the tone
along the cable length.
Increased tone
current
Increased detection ranges available from the
350 System.
Increased noise generation in repeaters of fibre-
optic cables.
C Cables and Tones
DPN 402197 Issue 2.1 TSS (UK) Limited Page C-3 of 4
Figure C1: Tone injection Short cables
You must connect the tone generator v
f
between the near end of the cable and a good ground
point. At the far end of the cable, you must connect the tone-carrying conductor to a good
ground point to provide an effective signal return path.
C.1.2.2 Long cables
As shown in Figure C2, the conductors possess some small capacitance to the environment
that surrounds the cable. If the cable is long (greater than approximately 100km) then the tone
signal will find a return path through the distributed capacitance C
c
of the cable. The imped-
ance of this path reduces as the tone frequency increases.
Figure C2: Tone injection Long cables
Under these circumstances, it is not always necessary to make a separate ground connection at
the far end of the cable.However, you will reduce the effects of tone leakage by connecting the
far end of the cable to a good grounding point.
The capacitance of the conductors extends throughout the length of the cable. This
represents a progressive short circuit that means less tone current flows at the far end
of the cable than at the near end. The detection range of the 350 System depends upon
the current flowing at the tone frequency. It follows therefore that the measurement
range of the 350 System decreases with the distance from the point of tone injection.
C.1.2.3 Fibre-optic Cables
In most cases, fibre-optic cables carry at least one conductor to supply power for the repeaters
or to act as a dedicated tone-carrying facility.
Alternatively, when there is no other conductor available, the armoured covering of a fibre-
optic cable can be used to carry the tone, provided it is insulated from ground.
The owner of the fibre-optic cable will usually specify the maximum level of tone current that
the cable can tolerate. This is to limit the amount of noise that may be generated within repeat-
ers along the cable.
350 Cable Survey System
Page C-4 of 4 TSS (UK) Limited Issue 2.1 DPN 402197
The 350 System cannot be used to survey a fibre-optic cable unless the cable can carry
an electrical tone through a conductive core or through its insulated armoured cover-
ing.
C.1.2.4 General Connection Requirements
Always use good grounding connections throughout the installation to avoid introducing
mains related frequencies onto the cable.
You must separate the return path from the outgoing tone current. Do not use a separate
conductor in the same cable to provide a return path.
Do not allow the tone current to exceed the maximum rating for cable circuits that have
repeaters.
C.1.3 Seawater Return Path
If the far end of the cable is in the water, then the sea water itself can provide the signal return
path. To use this method, you should attach a sacrificial anode to the exposed cable core and
seal the cable against water ingress at the far end.
D Reference
DPN 402197 Issue 2.1 TSS (UK) Limited Page D-1 of 4
D REFERENCE
This appendix contains reference information that may be useful to operators of the 350 Sys-
tem:
Configuration log
sheet:
To be used during System installation and configuration.
The information recorded on the log sheet allows the post-processing engineers to perform a
more accurate assessment of the survey data from the 350 System. A copy of the sheet must
therefore be retained with the Survey Log.
Make copies of the master log sheet if more are required.
Complete this log both before and after every survey, and file it with the survey records.
Run Display Screen: Refer to section 6.2.1.2 for a full description of the Run Display screen. Refer to the fold-out
drawing of a Run Display screen included in this appendix.
Forward Search
Screen:
Refer to section 6.2.1.3 for a full description of the Forward Search screen. Refer to the fold-out
drawing of a Forward Search screen included in this appendix.
350 Cable Survey System
Page D-2 of 4 TSS (UK) Limited Issue 2.1 DPN 402197
D Reference
DPN 402197 Issue 2.1 TSS (UK) Limited Page D-3 of 4
D.1 SURVEY DETAILS
Survey vessel [ ] Date [ ]
Survey vehicle [ ]
Site [ ]
Client [ ]
Project number [ ]
D.2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION DETAILS
SDC S/N [ ] Software version [ ]
SEP S/N [ ] Firmware version [ ]
Coil details: SL S/N [ ] Calibration constant [ ]
SV S/N [ ] Calibration constant [ ]
PL S/N [ ] Calibration constant [ ]
PV S/N [ ] Calibration constant [ ]
SF S/N [ ] Calibration constant [ ]
PF S/N [ ] Calibration constant [ ]
Coil separation distance [ ]cm
Altimeter source [ ] Altimeter S/N [ ] Enabled? [Y] [N]
Altimeter Offset [ ]cm Fixed coil altitude [ ]cm
External logging rate [4] [1] per second Analogue option fitted? [Y] [N]
Target type [ ]
Magnitude of tone current at source [ ]mA Tone frequency [ ]Hz
Reminder interval [ ]mins Threshold setting [ ]V
Audible alarm enabled? [Y] [N]
Survey completed by [ ]
TSS 350 Training Certificate Number [ ] Date of training [ ]
350 Cable Survey System
Page D-4 of 4 TSS (UK) Limited Issue 2.1 DPN 402197
E ALTIMETER
DPN 402197 Issue 2.1 VT TSS Limited Page E-1 of 18
E ALTIMETER
E.1 OVERVIEW
This appendix contains operating and service instructions for the ALT-250 sonar altimeter.
The ALT-250 is a high resolution sub-sea echo sounder designed to accurately determine the
height of sub sea instrumentation from the seabed.
The unit is supplied ready configured to use with TSS detection products.
The unit produces a narrow beam acoustic sonar pulse that illuminates a small section of the
seabed. The travel time for the pulse to be reflected from the seabed is measured using a high
stability timer and converted to distance in meters for output to the serial port where can be
recorded by the SEP, or transmitted to the SDC. Noise rejection algorithms allow the altimeter
to be used for short range measurements even in areas of high suspended sediment.
The electronics are housed in a corrosion resistant hard anodised aluminium pressure case
which can withstand depths up to 3000 metres dependent on the model.
A PRT100 temperature sensor is offered as standard and the reading is appended to the output
data string. A 7 way connector provides power and data to and from the altimeter.
E.2 INSTALLATION
E.2.1 Electrical Connection
The 7 way bulkhead connector is protected by the plastic end cap which also prevents the con-
nector turning and loosening the pressure seal between the connector and the pressure housing
face.
Table E1: Altimeter Specification
Transmit Frequency 250kHz
Transmit pulse width 40 microseconds
Beam width 9, conical
Pulse repetition rate 5/second
Maximum range 30m
Minimum range 0.8m
Digital output RS232 with switchable baud rates of 2400 or 9600
(other options available if required)
Resolution 1cm
Power requirement 8 TO 24 VDC (24VDC for modem option)
Supply current 50mA @ 17VDC
Maximum depth 3000m (dependent on depth sensor if fitted)
Mating connector Impulse LPMIL-7-MP Inline
Distance accuracy 76.2mm diameter, (87mm max) X 205mm
Temperature accuracy 0.5C standard.
440 Pipe and Cable Survey System
Page E-2 of 18 VT TSS Limited Issue 2.1 DPN 402197
The in-line connector, (male), must first be lubricated by smearing silicone lubricant or other
compatible silicone grease on all the pins. Ensure the lubricant does not cover any part of the
acoustic transducer encapsulation as this will have a detrimental effect on the acoustic proper-
ties of the transducer. If silicone grease is inadvertently splashed over the transducer face,
remove with a clean rag and wash with a mild detergent.
Ensure the connector pins are aligned correctly with the mating bulkhead connector before
applying force as the connectors can be damaged if incorrectly mated. If resistance is felt
when mating the connectors this means the pins are not aligned correctly in which case start
again.
When the connector is disconnected; insert dummy plugs or smear with silicone grease if the
connector is likely to be exposed to sea water or other corrosive element.
E.2.2 Serial Output
The connector supplies power and data between the altimeter and a terminal or other device
which can receive RS232 signal levels, for example the SEP. The internal switch, S1/3 allows
the option of two different baud rates to be chosen. The standard baud rate options are 2400,
(switch off) or 9600, (switch on) both with no parity, 8 data bits and one stop bit. For use with
the 440 or 350 system, leave switch S1/3 in the off position for 2400 baud.
The output format is the standard TSS/Datasonics string: see section 7.3.3 for details.
E.2.3 Mounting
Position the altimeter away from other acoustic instruments that may cause interference, this
may be necessary even if the other instrumentation is operating at a different frequency due to
the near field effect of the acoustic transmission.
Make sure the altimeter is positioned away from turbulence such as propeller noise or any-
thing that could cause aeration in the water, (acoustic signals are greatly attenuated by the
interface between sea water and air bubbles).
Table E2: Power/ data connector pinout
Pin No Wire Colour Function
1 Black Power 0V
2 White Aux input ground (optional)
3 Red +24VDC Power input
4 Green RS-232 Ground
5 Blue External trigger in (optional)
6 Brown RS-232 Transmit output
7 Yellow Aux signal (optional)
E ALTIMETER
DPN 402197 Issue 2.1 VT TSS Limited Page E-3 of 18
Figure E1: Mounting arrangement
Mount the altimeter using part number 305676, as shown in figure E1, or a secure mounting
bracket with, rubber protective sleeve around the altimeter body, making sure the altimeter
transducer is the nearest point to the seabed, in other words there must be no metal work that
could conduct the acoustic signal to the transducer by-passing the water column. Remember
the minimum range is 0.8 metres therefore if an under range data output is to be avoided
mount the altimeter at least 0.8 metres above the bottom.
Make sure the altimeter is mounted perpendicular to the horizontal flying position of the sub
sea vehicle, the beam angle is limited to 9 therefore any misalignment has a detrimental effect
on the operation of the altimeter. Ensure the mounting is secure and not liable to vibration or
movement.
Although the specification quotes 9 beam width the coverage area may increase at minimum
range due to the side lobes produced by the acoustic transducer. This can be caused by a
strong reflector close to the altimeter being reflected before the main beam echo is received
thus causing the object to be seen before the main beam is reflected off the seabed. This situa-
tion would cause a reduced range to be recorded.
Make sure the anodised aluminium finish is not damaged as this will cause corrosion when the
instrument is next deployed.
Connect an optional safety leash from the altimeter end cap using a stainless steel 8mm bolt
and two washers. Make sure the M8 bolt does not protrude to the aluminium bulkhead as this
will damage the anodising.
E.2.4 Maintenance
The altimeter should be immersed in fresh water if it is not to be used in the next couple of
days then placed in a dry environment. Inspect the transducer face and clean with a mild deter-
gent if the transducer face is not clean. It is important to ensure the transducer face is clean to
ensure maximum efficiency of acoustic energy into seawater. Ensure no silicone grease from
the connector is allowed to come into contact with the transducer face.
440 Pipe and Cable Survey System
Page E-4 of 18 VT TSS Limited Issue 2.1 DPN 402197
E.2.5 Test in Air
The altimeter should first be tested in air to ensure its correct operation. This can be done by
connecting the unit to +24VDC, or 8-24VDC if switch mode operation is selected, and reading
the serial output data with a PC terminal emulation program such as Hyper Terminal.
The range data output should read R99.99E when the unit is in air whilst temperature, (Txx.x),
should read air temperature. The altimeter should emit a ticking sound at a rate of 5 per sec-
ond thus confirming the transmitter is working and that the power supply is sufficient to power
the altimeter. If the voltage is too low to power the altimeter the serial data will still output data
but there will be no ticking sound.
The high frequency used for the altimeter is greatly attenuated in air therefore the signal is not
able to travel more than approximately 1 metre, (indicated) in air, although the signal can be
seen on an oscilloscope at TP7. The pre-deployment check should consist of rubbing the trans-
ducer face when the range serial output should change from 99.99 to an erratically changing
value.
E.2.6 Internal Settings
Ensure the internal switch is in the correct position: this should already be set for 2400 baud
for use with the TSS 440 and 350.
If the internal switch needs changing, make sure the housing is clean and free from debris
before unscrewing the captive retaining ring ensuring water or debris does not enter the pres-
sure housing when the transducer and electronics are separated.
As the electronics board is lifted from the housing make sure the interconnecting cable is free
and is not caught on components causing strain on the connector and wires.
Figure E2: Switch S1 layout
When the switch has been switched to the correct position the electronics board can be
inserted into the pressure housing first ensuring the interconnecting cable is free alongside the
printed circuit board. Ensure the board is slid down so the end of the board sits to one side of
the internal cable at the bulkhead connector taking care not to damage the internal anodised
finish of the O ring seal area as the PCB is slid down, (see figure E3).
Table E3: Switch S1 settings
1 Internal input select
On: TTL input, Off: RS-232 level input
2 Internal/ external trigger
On: External, Off: Internal (default)
3 Baud rate select
On: 9600, Off: 2400 (default)
4 Step-up power supply disable
On: 17-24V input, Off: 8-24V input (default)
1
2
3
4
8
7
6
5
RS232/TTL
INTERNAL/EXTERNAL
BAUD 2400/9600
SHUT DOWN
E ALTIMETER
DPN 402197 Issue 2.1 VT TSS Limited Page E-5 of 18
Figure E3: Reassembly of the unit.
Ensure the rubber O rings are free from contamination and if necessary remove and clean
the O rings and grooves before re-greasing with silicone or compatible O ring grease.
The area around the O rings must be meticulously clean to ensure a good pressure seal when
the unit enters the water. Inspect with a magnifying glass to make sure the surface of the O
ring and housing are clean.
E.3 THEORY OF OPERATION
This section describes the operation of the ALT250. The theory describes the general princi-
ples of acoustics and the technical description covers the basic operation of the altimeter. Do
not attempt to repair the altimeter unless you are an experienced electronics technician used to
working with surface mount components.
E.3.1 Operating Principles
The altimeter determines the round trip time of the Sonar pulse travelling from the transducer
through the water column then reflected off the seabed and received back at the transducer.
The time the Sonar pulse takes to make this journey equates to the two way distance. The dis-
tance can be determined by comparing the measured time to the known speed of sound in
water then dividing by 2 to get the one way distance.
The speed of sound in water varies according to conditions, (due mainly to salinity and tem-
perature). The altimeter defaults to 1480 metres/second which is a default average for speed of
sound in sea water.
E.3.1.1 Speed of Sound
The altimeter uses a high accuracy timer to measure the flight time of an acoustic pulse. The
timer is accurate to 1s, (0.74mm @1480metres/second), which is the speed of sound, (SOS),
default value, however this speed of sound value is dependent on many factors and requires an
accurate VP meter or CTD instrument to determine the exact value during the operation,
(see figure E4).
440 Pipe and Cable Survey System
Page E-6 of 18 VT TSS Limited Issue 2.1 DPN 402197
Figure E4: Speed of Sound meter
The change in SOS is mainly due to temperature where a change of 1C in sea water temper-
ature causes a change of approximately (0.0018 X SOS) metres/second, e.g. a SOS measure-
ment taken at 10C is 1480m/s but would change to ~1506.64m/s at 20C. Note: this is a very
approximate calculation and is included only to demonstrate the effect that temperature has on
VP.
The SOS is also affected, to a lesser extent, by changes in salinity and depth. There are many
different formulae for calculating SOS; for more information consult one of the many books
on this subject for example Robert J.Uricks Principles of Underwater Sound.
The Altimeter temperature reading is not used in the SOS calculation. The default SOS is
1480m/s; if a different value is required simply apply a correction to the serial output as fol-
lows: (SOS/1480) x Range reading.
E.3.1.2 Terminology
There are many acoustic terms associated with underwater acoustics and associated technol-
ogy; here are just some of them:
Sonar Equation: The transmitter sound source should be greater than all the losses due to
range, reflector, and sea water absorption plus the threshold value required at the receiver.
The altimeter is designed for losses over 30 metres.
Transducer: Converts electrical energy into sound or sound into electrical energy. This is
housed within the potting compound of the altimeter.
Transducer beam width: The area of sound when plotted to the half power point in front of
the transducer. This applies both to transmit and receive modes.
VP: Velocity of propagation or speed of sound
Noise level: Acoustic sounds in sea water due to ships, hydraulics, or other sonar equip-
ment.
Reflectivity: the attenuation of the transmitted sonar pulse due to the material/angle of the
reflector, (in this case the seabed).
DB: This is the term Decibel which is used to express sound level in relation to a reference
level, usually 1 micro Pascal at 1 metre. This can be negative when expressing receiver
sensitivity or positive if expressing transmitted sound level.
E ALTIMETER
DPN 402197 Issue 2.1 VT TSS Limited Page E-7 of 18
Absorption: The loss due to sea water which increases for higher frequency.
Reverberation: Received signals due to various scatterers of sonar signals such as sea sur-
face, tiny particles in the sea water and bottom reflections. This can be heard on old war
films as the slowly decaying quivering tonal blast following the ping of an echo sounder.
The altimeter locks on to the first signal and rejects the following reverb.
PRT100: Platinum Resistance Thermometer which consists of a platinum wire calibrated
for 100 ohms at 0C and 138.5 ohms at 100C. Accuracy is 0.15C for a class A device
as used in the altimeter.
Pressure sensor: Device for measuring depth in sea water. Consists of a strain gauge ele-
ment which converts pressure to an electrical signal.
Switch mode power supply: Circuitry within the altimeter which boosts the supply voltage
to the required level.
TVG: Time Varying Gain. This is applied to the sonar signal to compensate for range and
absorption losses in sea water. The altimeter TVG signature is stored in the non-volatile
memory of the microcontroller.
E.3.1.3 Propagation Loss
The propagation loss describes the weakening of sound between a point 1 metre from the sur-
face of the transducer and a point at distance from that point in the water column.
The propagation loss consists of spreading or ranging loss and loss due to attenuation in sea
water. The altimeter is designed to normalise these losses by applying a varying gain, (TVG),
to the sonar receiver.
Circuitry within the altimeter rejects near field signals from transducer side lobes to enable
detection of minimum range values.
E.3.1.4 Limitations
The altimeter must not be used alongside instruments operating at or near the same frequency.
The power supply should be DC with good regulation; the altimeter is designed for worst case
power supply electrical noise by the use of analogue filters at the DC power input, however,
noise at or near the Sonar frequency may cause problems.
The altimeter housing is hard anodised to protect from corrosion in sea water and for limited
protection from mishandling. The anodised surface must not be damaged as this will cause
corrosion to develop leading to eventual failure of the pressure housing.
The altimeter can be affected by transmission of sound through the supporting structure lead-
ing to an erroneous range value that is less than the correct range therefore to ensure this does
not happen make sure the altimeter is de-coupled mechanically from the structure by using
rubber inserts or similar.
The range of the unit is limited; however, it is possible to pick up reflections which are called
multiples. These multiple reflections give the impression of a good range being received by
the altimeter but are, in fact, pulses received from the previous transmission that have travelled
440 Pipe and Cable Survey System
Page E-8 of 18 VT TSS Limited Issue 2.1 DPN 402197
to the bottom or sea surface and been reflected in time for the reception time of the latest trans-
mission. The result is a range that should be outside the range of the altimeter appearing as a
good range.
The ships echo sounder should be checked to determine if ranges from the altimeter are multi-
ples from an over range water column.
Mount the altimeter at least 0.8m from the bottom of the sub sea vehicle; any range less than
0.8m will show as an error; however multiples can still be received.
E.3.2 Technical Description
The altimeter circuitry is divided into several sub systems to enable a clearer understanding of
the system. The sub systems are all manufactured on one printed circuit board.
Test points are available to aid faultfinding and commissioning. The circuitry uses miniature
surface mount components therefore great care must be taken to avoid damaging the circuitry.
Do not short connections as probes are inserted. The following points are present:.
E.3.2.1 Power Supply
Input voltage can range between 8-24VDC providing the SHDN signal is high; (S1/5 is off). If
the power supply is known to be constantly above 17VDC switch S1/5 can be switched on
thus disabling the dc-dc converter to conserve power.
The dc-dc converter is also controlled by an automatic switch which puts the circuit in SHDN
mode if the DC input is higher than 15.7VDC.
The transmitter voltage is regulated to 12.9VDC to allow operation of the transmitter driver
chip which requires at least 12VDC to operate, (the driver output will go open circuit if the
voltage falls below this).
The digital 5Vsupply is fed from a normal linear regulator. This supply inhibits the dc-dc con-
verter if it falls below approximately 4.5VDC.
Smoothing reservoir capacitors are used at the DC input and also at the +5VDC line to elimi-
nate any noise that is passed from the power supply.
Table E4: Testpoints
TP 1 Spare connection for MONO8 interface.
TP 2 Timer input to micro from sensor/ sonar receiver MUX.
TP 3 Raw sonar signal before bandpass but after sonar receiver.
TP 4 Sonar receiver output signal (positive pulse).
TP 5 Detected sonar signal (negative pulse).
TP 6 High voltage Tx signal across acoustic transducer.
TP 7 Transmitter Tx pulse TTL drive.
E ALTIMETER
DPN 402197 Issue 2.1 VT TSS Limited Page E-9 of 18
E.3.2.2 Transmitter
The microcontroller generates a TTL signal pulse at TP7 which determines operating fre-
quency and pulse length, both these parameters are programmed into the microcontrollers
flash memory and can be altered if necessary, by the manufacturer, using the programming
input header J4.
The transmitter power section is interfaced to the microcontroller signal level by a power
driver which is designed to switch high current signals via the two MOSFET transistors IC15
& IC17 through the step up transformer T1 or optionally T2.
The secondary inductance of the transformer and the capacitance of the transducer compo-
nents form a tuned circuit at the operating frequency thus forming a high amplitude sine wave.
Fine tuning of the transmitter output is achieved by adding capacitors to C43 and C47, (work-
ing voltage of the capacitors are 1000VDC).
The transmitter is inhibited if the +5VDC supply falls below 4.5VDC.
The transformer secondary inductance and tuning capacitors are kept out of the receiver path
by steering diodes. A damping resistor R45 reduces ringing from the transducer when the
transmitter pulse is removed.
E.3.2.3 Receiver
The same transducer is used to receive and transmit therefore protection diodes in series with a
resistor protect the sensitive receiver circuit when transmission occurs.
TVG is applied to the signal before being fed to a band pass filter set to the operating fre-
quency. The signal is then demodulated and fed to a threshold detector.
Gain control lines GAIN1-8 are fed from the microcontroller and provide TVG control of the
receiver; this enables received signals varying over a wide dynamic range to be received. The
initial sensitivity of the system is controlled by the microcontroller which switches an attenua-
tor into circuit reducing the amplitude of the signal before reaching the receiver.
Signal BLANK, from the microcontroller controls the attenuator for the initial reception
period which is set at a nominal 1 metre during which period high amplitude signals from side
lobes and near field objects are attenuated.
The output of the receiver is fed to a comparator which has two threshold settings set by the
microcontroller. The initial threshold is set approximately 4dB higher for this period thus
allowing echo signals to be received even when direct signals are still being received from the
effect of transducer ringing.
The detected receiver signal is fed to a capture timer on the microcontroller which stops the
timer on the negative edge of the received pulse.
The same timer channel is also used to read the temperature/depth transducer; this is carried
out by a multiplexer connected to both circuits and controlled by the microcontroller.
440 Pipe and Cable Survey System
Page E-10 of 18 VT TSS Limited Issue 2.1 DPN 402197
E.3.2.4 Sensor Circuitry
The sensor circuitry is a complete front end for the measurement of passive sensors such as
temperature and pressure using an advanced chopping technique to remove low frequency
interference. The analogue sensor signal is converted into a digital format and read by the
microcontroller. The sensor interface converts to 12 bit accuracy.
A three phase technique is used to measure system offset, reference and finally the sensor sig-
nal. Good long term stability is assured by the auto calibration process carried out by the
microcontroller to determine changes in offset and reference for each measurement period.
The sensor circuitry is located close to the sensor to reduce resistance between sensor and
electronics; however, even the small resistance changes due to temperature effect etc. are cor-
rected by software using the offset and reference measurements.
The chopping technique filters out any spurious noise generated by internal or external cir-
cuits.
The accuracy of the sensor is determined by the accuracy of the temperature or depth sensor
itself and the reference resistor R1. Corrections can also be made in the microcontroller to
achieve greater accuracy. The reference resistor is currently a 100R resistor 0.01% < 0.6ppm/
C accuracy which equates to an initial accuracy of 0.01R or 0.026C plus temperature drift
which is negligible.
E.3.2.5 Digital Circuitry
The digital circuitry comprises the microcontroller and serial communication plus associated
circuitry. The microcontroller operates at a speed of 8MHz and is used to process all transmis-
sion and receive functions in conjunction with the associated hardware.
The firmware for the microcontroller, (68HC908KX8), can be programmed using the mini
MONO8 connector at J4. This connector allows the micro to be programmed in-situ using
its flash memory to retain the data when power is removed.
Standard tools from Motorola are available that allow the manufacturer to program via this
connection without the need to connect to the power supply.
The serial data is converted to RS232 levels in the digital section where the usual protection
diodes etc. are situated.
The +12VDC for the RS232 interface is derived from the transmitter +12VDC and the minus -
12VDC from a +12VDC to -12V DC-DC converter circuit.
E.3.2.6 Averaging Algorithm
The microcontroller uses a moving weighted averaging algorithm to ensure that any momen-
tary noise or interference from the Sonar signal does not appear as a range at the data output.
This is achieved by giving each new range a weight of 25% while the previous range is given a
weight of 75%. If the new range differs significantly from the old the new range will be
replaced with the old. If more than two unacceptable ranges are received the next new range is
accepted. Each new range occurs approximately 0.2 second apart.
E ALTIMETER
DPN 402197 Issue 2.1 VT TSS Limited Page E-11 of 18
E.3.2.7 Optional Modem
Position IC1 is for an optional modem module. This module receives the serial data from the
altimeter and superimposes the data on to the +24VDC power cable; this allows the altimeter
to connect using just two cable cores over long cables using FSK modem technology. To use
this option the power supply must be +24VDC. Switch S1 switch 3 and switch 4 to the on
position to select 9600 baud and dc-dc converter inhibit.
E.4 PART NUMBERS
Table E5: Part numbers
500292 Altimeter, subsea TSS-ALT-250 (no cable or accessories)
500294 As above, detection kit (includes bracket 601824A)
500295 Altimeter, including 3m pigtail 601826A
601824A Cable ALT-250 to TSS 350/440 SEP (3m)
601825A Cable ALT-250 to TSS 350/440 SEP (7m)
601826A Pigtail (3m)
601827A Pigtail (7m)
402321 Separate manual
307558 O-Ring
402608 Carton
200809 Mini wet-pluggable free lead, LPMIL-7-MP200809
305676 Mounting kit
440 Pipe and Cable Survey System
Page E-12 of 18 VT TSS Limited Issue 2.1 DPN 402197
E.5 DRAWINGS
Figure E5: Block Diagram
G
N
D
*
D
I
S
A
B
L
E
S
D
C
-
D
C
C
O
N
V
E
R
T
E
R
(
O
n
l
y
u
s
e
f
o
r
v
o
l
t
a
g
e
s
a
b
o
v
e
1
6
V
D
C
)
o
r
M
O
D
E
M
o
p
t
i
o
n
S
W
I
T
C
H
P
O
S
I
T
I
O
N
S
2
3
4
O
F
F
O
N
9 6 0 0 2 4 0 0
J
2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
E X T I N T
R X 2 3 2 R X D 1
M
2
W 3 F 4 7 0
S
O
N
A
R
_
0
S
O
N
A
R
T
C
H
1
T
X
H
I
R
X
H
I
G
N
D
A
C
G
N
D
G
N
D
V
C
C
T
C
H
0
G
A
I
N
4
G
A
I
N
1
G
A
I
N
8
G
A
I
N
2
B
L
A
N
K
U T I _ P D
G N D
V C C
S
1
1 2 3 4
8 7 6 5
G
A
I
N
8
G
A
I
N
4
G
A
I
N
2
G
A
I
N
1
C O N F I G
T
C
H
0
B
L
A
N
K
B
A
U
D
I
N
T
E
X
T
G
N
D
D
I
G
I
T
A
L
_
0
D
I
G
I
T
A
L
T C H 0
U
T
I
_
P
D
T
C
H
0
T
C
H
1
B
L
A
N
K
G
A
I
N
1
G
A
I
N
8
G
A
I
N
4
G
A
I
N
2
G N D
R S 2 3 2 R X D
R S 2 3 2 T X D
T X D
V C C
R X D
B A U D
V
C
C
G
N
D
I N T E X T
T T L R S 2 3 2 _ 1
T T L R S 2 3 2 _ 2
F
1
S
M
D
1
0
0
3
0
V
2
1
S
W
I
T
C
H
P
O
S
I
T
I
O
N
S
1
:
O
N
=
E
X
T
I
/
P
T
T
L
O
F
F
=
E
X
T
I
/
P
R
S
2
3
2
2
:
O
N
=
E
X
T
T
R
I
G
G
E
R
O
F
F
=
I
N
T
E
R
N
A
L
T
R
I
G
G
E
R
3
:
O
N
=
*
9
6
0
0
B
A
U
D
O
F
F
=
2
4
0
0
B
A
U
D
4
:
O
N
=
*
M
I
N
S
U
P
P
L
Y
=
1
6
V
O
F
F
=
M
I
N
S
U
P
P
L
Y
=
7
V
(
o
n
s
w
i
t
c
h
e
s
o
f
f
t
h
e
d
c
-
d
c
c
o
n
v
e
r
t
e
r
f
o
r
b
e
t
t
e
r
e
f
f
i
c
i
e
n
c
y
)
G N D
V C C
R X D
+
1
2
V
T
X
D
R
X
D
A
U
X
_
I
/
P
0
V
T X D
A
N
A
L
O
G
U
E
_
0
A
N
A
L
O
G
U
E
T C H 0
U T I _ P D
E C A B F
G
N
D
V C C
D
D
R
4
D
R
3
D
R
3
_
4
_
C
P
O
W
E
R
_
H
I
G
N
D
G N D
S
H
D
N
R
E
F
_
H
D
1
S
1
G
1
2
P
O
W
E
R
_
H
I
S
H
D
N
T
C
H
1
(
*
M
O
D
E
M
P
O
S
I
T
I
O
N
)
I
C
1
M
O
D
-
I
/
F
-
1
G N D
3
D A T A O U T
6
+ 5 V
4
A U X I / P
5
P O W E R _ L O
2
P O W E R _ H I
1
D A T A I N
7
O
P
T
I
O
N
A
L
M
O
D
E
M
P
W
R
I
N
H
J
1
4
H
E
A
D
E
R
1 2 3 4
d
a
t
a
f
r
o
m
a
l
t
i
m
e
t
e
r
R
E
F
_
L
R
E
F
_
L
R
1
R R E F 0 . 0 1 %
1 2
S
E
N
S
L
G
N
D
R
S
2
3
2
R
X
D
A
U
X
I
/
P
S
E
N
S
L
_
1
S
E
N
S
L
_
2
R
E
F
_
H
U
T
I
_
P
D
P
O
W
E
R
:
G
R
O
U
P
1
A
N
A
L
O
G
U
E
I
/
F
:
G
R
O
U
P
2
T
O
B
U
L
K
H
E
A
D
C
O
N
N
E
C
T
O
R
S
E
N
S
O
R
I
N
T
E
R
F
A
C
E
T
R
A
N
S
D
U
C
E
R
I
/
F
S
E
N
S
H
F
O
R
C
E
_
H
M
I
C
R
O
C
O
N
T
R
O
L
E
R
:
G
R
O
U
P
4
C
O
M
M
S
:
G
R
O
U
P
3
S
O
N
A
R
T
X
:
G
R
O
U
P
6
S
O
N
A
R
R
X
:
G
R
O
U
P
5
M
3
N
F
M
6
1
R
1
n
F
T
T
L
R
S
2
3
2
_
1
T
C
H
0
V
C
C
T
T
L
R
S
2
3
2
_
2
V C C
G N D
T
X
H
I
A
C
G
N
D
R
X
H
I
G
N
D
M
1
W
3
F
4
7
0
G
N
D
1
R S 2 3 2 T T L
S H D N N O R M
J
3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
R
S
2
3
2
T
X
D
0
V
0
V
P
W
R
I
N
H
G
N
D
G
N
D
E ALTIMETER
DPN 402197 Issue 2.1 VT TSS Limited Page E-13 of 18
Figure E6: Internal wiring
Figure E7: Temperature sensor wiring
2
1
3
4
5
6
7
GND
AUX INPUT GND
+24V
SER OUT GND
SER OUT
AUX INPUT
3
1
6
4
7
2
2
1
3
4
5
6
7
1
2
1
2
1
2
PWR IN
AUX IN
0V
GND
TXD
GND
EXT TRIG/SER IN EXT TRIG/SER IN
GREEN
BLUE
BLACK
BROWN
YELLOW
RED
WHITE
Underwater connector Internal wiring J3 (on PCB)
JP?
HEADER 9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
R22
2K2
FORCE_H RED
SENS_H RED
SENS_L WHITE
R1
100R REF
R
E
F
H
1
REFH1 WHITE
FORCEL
REFH
REFL
REFL
REFH
FORCEL
308-7827 SENSOR
PRT100
440 Pipe and Cable Survey System
Page E-14 of 18 VT TSS Limited Issue 2.1 DPN 402197
Figure E8: ALT-250 / TSS underwater splice p/n 601824A
1 2 3
4
W
I
R
I
N
G
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
:
I
T
E
M
1
T
O
I
T
E
M
2
1 3
3
6
4 1
&
5
N
O
C
O
N
N
E
C
T
I
O
N
T
O
O
T
H
E
R
P
I
N
S
2
V
I
E
W
L
O
O
K
I
N
G
A
T
P
I
N
S
O
N
P
A
R
T
S
R
E
Q
U
I
R
E
D
:
1
.
I
M
P
U
L
S
E
L
P
M
I
L
-
7
-
M
P
O
R
E
Q
V
T
1
5 6
3
4
3
.
H
E
A
T
S
H
R
I
N
K
C
A
B
L
E
L
A
B
E
L
:
4
.
C
L
E
A
R
A
D
H
E
S
I
V
E
L
I
N
E
D
H
E
A
T
S
H
R
I
N
K
S
L
E
E
V
E
O
V
E
R
L
A
B
E
L
6
0
1
8
2
4
A
"
6
0
1
8
2
4
A
"
T
S
S
P
/
N
W
I
T
H
3
m
T
A
I
L
P
L
F
A
C
E
O
F
F
R
E
E
C
O
N
N
E
C
T
O
R
V
I
E
W
L
O
O
K
I
N
G
A
T
P
I
N
S
O
N
(
P
L
)
(
P
L
)
P
L
I
T
E
M
1
I
T
E
M
2
E ALTIMETER
DPN 402197 Issue 2.1 VT TSS Limited Page E-15 of 18
Figure E9: ALT-250 free cable
3
m

0
.
0
5
m
N
T
S
P
A
R
T
S
R
E
Q
U
I
R
E
D
:
*
I
M
P
U
L
S
E
L
P
M
I
L
-
7
-
M
P
O
R
E
Q
V
T
1
3
4
*
*
H
E
A
T
S
H
R
I
N
K
C
A
B
L
E
L
A
B
E
L
:
*
*
*
C
L
E
A
R
A
D
H
E
S
I
V
E
L
I
N
E
D
H
E
A
T
S
H
R
I
N
K
S
L
E
E
V
E
O
V
E
R
L
A
B
E
L
6
0
1
8
2
6
A
"
6
0
1
8
2
6
A
"
T
S
S
P
/
N
W
I
T
H
3
m
T
A
I
L
S
O
1
8
/
8
P
L
F
A
C
E
O
F
F
R
E
E
C
O
N
N
E
C
T
O
R
V
I
E
W
L
O
O
K
I
N
G
A
T
P
I
N
S
O
N
5
0
m
m

5
m
m
5
*
*
*
*
I
D
E
N
T
S
L
E
E
V
E
S
F
I
T
T
E
D
A
T
R
H
E
N
D
O
F
C
A
B
L
E
.
4
0
0
m
m

5
0
m
m
440 Pipe and Cable Survey System
Page E-16 of 18 VT TSS Limited Issue 2.1 DPN 402197
Figure E10: PCB layout - top
Figure E11: PCB - top
E ALTIMETER
DPN 402197 Issue 2.1 VT TSS Limited Page E-17 of 18
Figure E12: PCB layout - bottom
Figure E13: PCB bottom
440 Pipe and Cable Survey System
Page E-18 of 18 VT TSS Limited Issue 2.1 DPN 402197
Index
DPN 402197 Issue 2.1 TSS (UK) Limited Page i
A
ALT 1-5
Altimeter 2-12
Configuration 6-20
Connection See SEP Altimeter port
Connection to SDC 4-8
Connection to SEP 4-8
Data format 7-14
Depth rating 2-3
Dualtrack See Dualtrack
Installation 3-11
Altimeter test 6-21
Altitude of ROV See ALT
Analogue output 2-3, 6-26, B-3
Analogue output option 7-28
Configuration B-4
Enable/disable B-4
Output voltages B-5
Polarity B-4
Scaling B-4
Specification B-2
Trim B-4
Automatic steering
see Analogue outout
B
Burial Depth see COV
C
Care of connectors 4-4
Cathodic protection 7-26
Coils 2-10
Calibration constant 3-6, 6-20
Circuit description 9-3
Connection 4-6
Directional response A-5
Dualtrack see Dualtrack
Installation 3-5
Orientation 3-6
Reference line 3-5
Separation distance 3-11, 6-19
Serial number 3-6
Triad assembly 3-6
COMMS LED 5-3
Communication method
SDC 4-15
SEP 4-13
Communications
Dualtrack see Dualtrack
Connection
Care of connectors 4-4
Coils 4-6
Ground 4-3
SDC see SDC
Sub-sea power 4-5
Connector care 4-4
Corrosion prevention 4-3
COV 1-5
Curved target course 7-27
D
Data Fields
Signal voltage 7-9
Data fields 7-8
Signal voltages 7-13
Target coordinates 7-8, 7-11
Data logging 6-22
Connection 4-17
External logging format 7-8
Forward search mode 7-10
Internal logging format 7-11
Replay 6-29
Survey mode 7-8
Depth of target cover see COV
Depth rating
Recognition 2-3
Display Software
Frequency Spectrum see Spectrum Dis-
play
Oscilloscope
See Oscilloscope
Run Mode 6-8
Run Mode see Display software
Display software
Analogue output configuration B-4
Coil calibration 6-20
Coil separation distance 6-19
Configuration file 6-3
Default configuration 6-23
Forward search mode
Starting from DOS 5-4
System configuration 5-8, 6-8
Terminal window 6-16
Threshold 6-2, 6-18
Tone frequency 6-18
Display sofware
System errors 6-15
Dualtrack B-6
350 Cable Survey System
Page ii TSS (UK) Limited Issue 2.1 DPN 402197
440 communication method B-13
Altimeter installation B-12
Coils installation B-10
Communication method B-13
Display software B-7
SDC B-9
SEP connection B-11
SEP interconnection B-13
Supply voltage B-12, B-14
Upgrade of an existing System B-13
E
Earth return path 7-27
Error sources 7-21
Vehicle pitch 7-23
Vehicle position 7-21
Vehicle roll 7-22
Errors
Interference 7-25
External logging format see Data logging
F
Forward range to target see FWD
Forward search mode 3-12, 7-5, A-7
Altimeter within 6-12
Data fields 7-10
Frequency spectrum display A-3
FWD 6-13
I
Installation
Altimeter see Altimeter
Coils 3-5
Dualtrack see Dualtrack
SEP see SEP
Interference 7-25
Internal logging format see Data logging
L
LAT 3-5, 6-10
Lateral offset see LAT
LED 5-3
N
Noise 7-21
Cathodic protection 7-26
Curved target course 7-27
Earth return path 7-27
Ferrous rock deposits 7-26
Power cable surveys 7-26
Vehicle noise 7-25
Vibration 7-25
O
Operating theory A-1
Options
Analogue output 7-28
Analogue output see Analogue Output
Dualtrack see Dualtrack
Oscilloscope 6-14
P
Power
Dualtrack see Dualtrack
SEP 9-7
Q
Quality Control 6-10
Quality control 6-31
Envelope 6-31
envelope 8-5
flags 7-8
R
ROV altitude see Altimeter
Run display screen A-5
Skew A-8
Run mode
Coil drive 6-11
S
Saturation 7-11
SDC 2-4
COM 2 altimeter port 4-8
Communication method 4-15
Communication ports 5-6
Initialisation 5-4
Power connection 4-10
Servicing 9-9
Video ports 4-17
Virus protection 2-7
Search angle A-7
Sensor port 4-5, 4-9
SEP 1-4, 2-8, 4-4
Altimeter port 4-8
Blanking plugs 4-5, 4-7, 4-9
COM 3 data logging port 4-17
Communication method 4-13
Index
DPN 402197 Issue 2.1 TSS (UK) Limited Page iii
Depth rating 2-3
Disassembly and reassembly 9-11
Grounding 4-3
Installation 3-3, 4-10
Mounting block 3-3
Power connection 4-5
Power requirements 9-7
Sensor port 4-5, 4-9
Servicing
SDC 9-9
Skew 6-10, 6-13, A-8
Spectrum Display 6-14
Status bar 6-11
Subsea Electronics Pod See SEP
T
Target coordinates 1-5
Theory of operation A-1
Threshold 6-2
Tone
configuring 6-18
V
Vehicle 7-28
Altitude 7-28
Automatic steering 7-28
Speed of operation 7-28
Tracked vehicle 7-28
Video 4-17
Video Overlay
Setup 6-23
Video overlay
Connection 4-17
Viruses 2-7
VRT 3-5
350 Cable Survey System
Page iv TSS (UK) Limited Issue 2.1 DPN 402197

Common questions